2010 Porsche 911 gt3 84287 PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 251

Umschlag_21_us_englisch.fm Seite 1 Donnerstag, 4.

Juni 2009 9:06 21

911 GT3
Owner’s Manual
10_GT3_21.book Seite 1 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

WKD 997 521 10 05/09 Orientation guides in the


© Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG
Owner’s Manual
Porsche, the Porsche crest, 911, Carrera, PCCB, The orientation guides in the Owner’s Manual are
PCM, PSM and Tequipment are registered trade- highlighted in yellow.
marks and the distinctive shapes of Porsche
automobiles are trademarks of Overall Table of Contents
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG. At the start of the Owner’s Manual you will find an
All rights reserved. overview of the overall contents of the Owner’s
Manual.
Printed in Germany
Section Contents
There is a summary of topics with the corre-
sponding page numbers at the beginning of each
main chapter.

Index
There is a detailed, alphabetical index at the end
of this Owner’s Manual.

1
10_GT3_21.book Seite 2 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Dear Owner, A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how Warning!


you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition
Any alteration or misuse of the vehicle can
We would like to thank you for your purchase of a by having it serviced regularly.
lead to accidents and severe or fatal
Porsche Sports car. A separate Warranty and Customer Informa-
personal injuries.
tion Booklet contains detailed information about
Judging by the car you have chosen, you are a Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or
the warranties covering your Porsche.
motorist of a special breed, and you are probably interfere with those safety features built into
no novice when it comes to automobiles. the vehicle. Modifications may be carried out
For U.S. only:
on your vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
Remember however, as with any vehicle, you If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe
should take time to familiarize yourself with your could cause a crash, injury or death, you should manner obeying the local laws and in the
Porsche and its performance characteristics. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic light of driving conditions faced by you, and
Always drive within your own unique capabilities as Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to in accordance with the instructions provided
a driver and your level of experience with your notifying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. in this Owner’s Manual.
Porsche. Ensure that anyone else driving your (Porsche Cars N.A.).
Porsche does the same. To prevent or minimize f Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those
injury, always use your safety belts. Never If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open laws and driving conditions, or by ignoring the
consume alcohol or drugs before or during the an investigation, and if it finds that a safety instructions in this manual.
operation of your vehicle. problem exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
This Owner’s Manual contains a host of useful cannot become involved in individual problems
information. Please take the time to read this between you and your dealer, or
manual before you drive your new Porsche. Porsche Cars N.A.
Become familiar with the operation of your
Porsche car for maximum safety and operating To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
pleasure. The better you know your Porsche, the Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-
more pleasure you will experience driving your 424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
new car. write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Always keep your Owner’s Manual in the car, and Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
give it to the new owner if you ever sell your You can also obtain other information about motor
Porsche. vehicle safety from http://www.savercar.gov.
Your car has thousands of parts and components
which have been designed and manufactured in
accordance with Porsche’s high standards of
engineering quality and safety.

2
10_GT3_21.book Seite 3 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Regularly check your vehicle for signs of Warning! Note to owners


damage.
For your own protection and longer service life of
Damaged or missing aerodynamic compon- In Canada, this manual is also available in French.
your car, please follow all operating instructions
ents such as spoilers or underside panels To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to:
and special warnings. These special warnings use
affect the driving behavior and therefore
the safety alert symbol, followed by the words
must be replaced immediately. Note aux proprietaires
Danger, Warning and Caution. These special
Your car may have all or some of the components warnings contain important messages regarding
described in this manual. your safety and/or the potential for damage to Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de
Should you have difficulty understanding any of your Porsche. Ignoring them could result in ce Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire
the explanations of features or equipment installed serious mechanical failure, serious personal injury ou du:
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche or death. Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd.
dealer. He/She will be glad to assist you. Also Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE
check with your dealer on other available options f Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could
or equipment. create dangerous conditions or defeat safety 5925 Airport Road
engineering features built into your car. Suite 420
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the
driver’s side of the vehicle, and right as the f Do not misuse your Porsche. Use it safely, and Mississauga, Ontario
passenger’s side of the vehicle. consistently with the law, according to the Canada, L4V 1W1
driving conditions, and the instructions in this Telephone number for customer assistance:
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual
manual. 1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3
are based on the information available at the time
of printing. Alteration or misuse of your Porsche could
It has always been Porsche’s policy to conti- cause accidents and serious personal injury
nuously improve its products. Porsche, therefore, or death.
reserves the right to make changes in design and
specification, and to make additions or improve-
ments in its product without incurring any obliga-
tion to install them on products previously manuf-
actured.
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable
driving in your Porsche.

3
10_GT3_21.book Seite 4 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Safety notes! Please bear in mind that use on race tracks Motor racing
subjects all vehicle components to considerably
Your vehicle warranty does not cover use in
more wear than normal use, making professional For reasons of safety, the braking system,
competition, racing or track use or other events.
inspection and maintenance after each use a vital steering, running gear, wheels and tires of your
Components and/or parts that fail during racing
precondition for functioning and safety. car should be checked after every use on a race
or driving events (including Porsche sponsored
track.
events) will not be covered by the manufacturer Please use only Original Porsche Parts for your
On public highways, the running gear and rear
new car limited warranty or the pre-owned vehicle car. These parts are available from your autho-
wing must be in the standard position.
warranty. rized Porsche dealer, who has expert knowledge
concerning the range of approved parts and will
Your new 911 GT3 has been developed with Power transmission
be pleased to advise you further.
experience gained from the development, testing,
and driving of countless GT vehicles. While The use of other parts or accessories which are The differential lock, which was designed for use
drivable on public roads, the GT3 is specially neither Genuine Porsche Parts nor approved by on race tracks, may make a slight noise when
equipped for racing on racetracks and is set up at Porsche may adversely affect the safety of your maneuvering and on tight corners.
the factory for the adjustments required for car, and Porsche can take no responsibility for any
racing. loss or damage caused by their use.
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
The GT3 can be adapted to either the racing or the Even if the supplier of other accessories or parts
street environment. In each case, take into is a recognized supplier, the safety of your car PSM should always be switched on during
account that a modern high-performance sports may still be affected if such items are installed. ”normal“ driving. This is particularly the case when
car is a complex system whose individual compo- Due to the large variety of products offered in the the road is wet.
nents are carefully adjusted to work well together. accessory market it is not possible for Porsche to
inspect and approve every one.
Interfering in this system is only an option if it can
be guaranteed that all of the components will When your Porsche is driven in normal driving
continue to work together according to the actual situations on public roads, away from the
running conditions. Well-founded Porsche racetrack, please note that the use of replace-
technical specialist knowledge is necessary for ment parts which are not Genuine Porsche Parts,
this. You should seek advice from your authorized or approved parts, or the use of accessories not
Porsche dealer. approved by Porsche may also detrimentally
affect the Warranties relating to your car.
Here, you will receive information about sports
parts available from Porsche, their reliability on Note again that in no case will Porsche warrant
public roads and important maintenance notes. any parts damaged while racing your vehicle, on
or off the track.

4
10_GT3_21.book Seite 5 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Development philosophy The design of the tire is also geared towards use – The driver’s skill level must be commensurate
on racing circuits (driver safety training courses, with the vehicle performance levels in the
Porsche 911 GT3 stands for a sports car with sports driving schools, Club Sport events) and upper range limits, due to increased safety
exceptional performance, both on the road and on provides distinct advantages here in terms of dry risks in the upper range limits.
the race track. This objective means that, in the grip and wear compared to conventional road
f At oudside temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C)
event of any compromise being required between tires.
change to winter tires.
sportiness and comfort during the development
The major features are a reduced tread depth and
process, the tendency will be geared more f Notify anyone using your car of these charac-
a special tread pattern and carcass.
towards sportiness. This can result in the following teristics and possible effects.
restrictions in comfort: Due to ultra high performance design and the
particular manufacturing process of these tires, Danger!
– Brake squeal when light pressure applied to
they must always be replaced in axle sets (2)
the pedal shortly before stopping. Risk of accident through loss of road surface
regardless of wear or mileage. Failure to do so
– Rough engine operation in speed range around may have a negative affect on the handling charac- contact, control over the vehicle and braking
3000 rpm. teristics of the vehicle. ability, leading to serious personal injury or
death.
– Cracking noise in area of front-axle coil The design features of this sports tire result The reduced tire tread depth means that
springs. in the following effects compared with other there is an increased risk of hydroplaning on
– Greater operating force for clutch and gear summer tires when used under normal wet roads.
shifting. driving conditions: f When driving on wet or mud-covered roads
– Aerodynamic-related extremely low vehicle – Sport tires have a smaller tread depth, and reduce speed significantly.
position with restrictions in terms of ground thus can reach their wear limit sooner.
clearance. As with all tires, the attainable mileage
Danger!
depends on the individual driving style and the
conditions of use. Risk of accident from worn tires.
Sport tires Sport tires have a smaller tread depth, and
– Exercise caution when driving on wet roads,
Your vehicle is equipped with special sport tires thus can reach their wear limit sooner.
paying special attention to hydroplaning situa-
(ultra high performance tires). It is important to check tire wear frequently
tions (stagnant water, puddles, lane grooves).
to avoid risk of serious personal injury or
This type of tire is approved for use on public Sport tires have a lower tread depth than
death from worn tires.
highways and complies with all statutory require- normal tires and you must therefore adapt
ments and safety criteria. speed accordingly when driving on wet f Check tire wear frequently.
surfaces.

5
10_GT3_21.book Seite 6 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Service brake Aerodynamic components Due to the reduced ground clearance required for
optimization of road handling, the front lip and the
Both the standard brake system with composite To benefit from the high driving performance air-brake spoilers have to be placed in exposed
brake discs and the Porsche Ceramic Composite without impairing the driving safety or the service positions to fulfil their function. They can be
Brake (PCCB) are high-performance brake life of the vehicle components, certain vehicle damaged, for example by ground or curbstone
systems, designed specifically for driving on race parts must be always fully operational while contact.
circuits. driving.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient condi-
f Regularly check your vehicle for signs of Seating
tions (e. g. temperature and humidity) therefore
damage.
might cause brake noises. This also applies after Your car has two seats.
Damaged, worn or missing aerodynamic
completion of the running-in phase required for the The area behind the seats is not intended for
components such as spoilers or underside
new brake components. passengers.
panels affect driving behaviour and must there-
Wear on the different components of the braking fore be replaced immediately.
system, such as brake pads and brake discs, Danger!
To optimize the cooling of the brake discs, air
depends to a great extent on the individual driving In the event of an accident, serious personal
brake spoilers are fitted to the front and rear
style and the conditions of use and therefore injury or death can result.
running gear control arms as well as special air
cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road.
brake ducts on the rear axle. f Never allow anyone to sit in the area behind the
The values communicated by Porsche are based seats.
If these air-brake spoilers or air-brake ducts are
on normal operation adapted to traffic. Wear incre- Persons occupying the area to the rear of the
not fitted and there is a high thermal demand on
ases considerably when the vehicle is driven on two seats will not have a safety belt or airbag
the braking system, the service life of the brake
race tracks or through an aggressive driving style. protection, and in the event of an accident,
discs could be reduced.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer would be thrown around within or to the
Brake wear expectations are based on normal outside of the vehicle compartment with
about the current guidelines in effect before
operations in street traffic. Wear increases consi- probable serious personal injury or death as
such use of your vehicle.
derably when the vehicle is driven on race tracks the result.
or with an aggressive driving style. Wear will also
increase considerably if the brakes are not
warmed up before being raced.
The aerodynamic stability of the vehicle is influ-
enced considerably at high speeds by the front lip.

6
10_GT3_21.book Seite 7 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Technical modifications Setting and operating vehicle Portable Fuel Containers


Modifications may be carried out on your vehicle components when driving
Danger!
only if approved by Porsche. This ensures that
your Porsche will remain reliable and safe to drive, Warning! Portable fuel containers may leak, whether
and that it will not be damaged as a result of the There is a danger of accident if you set or they are full or partially empty. Fuel leaking
modifications. operate the on-board computer, radio, from a portable container carried in your
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to navigation system, telephone or other equip- vehicle could, in case of an accident, cause
advise you. ment while driving. a fire or explosion, resulting in serious
This could distract you from the traffic and personal injury or death.
Coverings cause you to lose control of the vehicle resul- f Never carry additional fuel in portable contai-
ting in serious personal injury or death. ners in your vehicle.
f Do not affix any coverings (e.g. films or „stone
f Operate the components while driving only if
guards“) in the area of the headlights and air
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
intakes.
Damage due to excessive temperatures and f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
abrasion could result. procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
The headlights can mist up depending on the tem-
perature and humidity.
f To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
the gap between headlight and body.

7
10_GT3_21.book Seite 8 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Ground Clearance California Proposition 65 Warning Hot Exhaust Pipes

Caution! Warning! Warning!

Risk of damage. The vehicle may touch the Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and Risk of burn injury when standing near or
ground as a result of reduced ground certain vehicle components contain or emit chemi- coming into contact with the exhaust pipe.
clearance. cals known to the State of California to cause
The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
f Drive carefully and slowly on steep slopes (e.g. harm.
and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
parking lots, curbs, uneven roads, lifting turned off.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
platforms etc.). certain products of component wear contain or f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
f Avoid steep ramps. emit chemicals known to the State of California to your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproduc- your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
tive harm. supervise children around the vehicle when the
Engine Exhaust exhaust pipe could be hot.
A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns.
Danger!
Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled.
Engine exhaust fumes have many compon-
ents which you can smell. They also contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
and odorless gas.
Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
ness and even death if inhaled.
f Never start or let the engine run in an
enclosed, unventilated area.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for
prolonged periods with the engine on and the
car not moving.

8
10_GT3_21.book Seite 9 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Table of Contents
Engine Exhaust ............................................... 8 Brakes .........................................................54 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)...89
Dear Porsche Owner ..................................... 11 ABS Brake System Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms...........91
Before driving off... ....................................... 11 (Antilock Brake System).................................57 iPod, USB and AUX .......................................93
In the driver’s seat... ..................................... 12 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)..............59 Fire Extinguisher ...........................................94
On the road... ............................................... 12 Sport mode ..................................................62 HomeLink.....................................................95
Break in hints for the first Porsche Active Suspension Management Automatic Air Conditioning System .................98
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers....................... 13 (PASM).........................................................63 Central and Side Vents ................................101
Never invite car theft! .................................... 17 Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) ..................63 Fresh-air Intake ...........................................101
Keys ............................................................ 18 Front Axle Lift System ...................................64 Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating.....102
Key with Radio Remote Control ...................... 19 Interior Lights ...............................................66 Instrument Panel USA Models ......................104
Doors .......................................................... 21 Ignition/Starter Switch with Instrument Panel Canada Models..................106
Central Locking ............................................ 22 anti-theft Steering Lock .................................67 Engine Oil Temperature ...............................108
Alarm System, Starting Procedures ......................................70 Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ........108
Passenger Compartment Monitoring .............. 26 Stopping Engine ...........................................71 Instrument Illumination.................................108
Power Windows ............................................ 28 Emergency Flasher Switch.............................72 Trip Odometer ............................................109
Door mirrors ................................................ 30 Light Switch .................................................73 Speedometer .............................................110
Inside mirror................................................. 31 Dynamic Cornering Light ...............................74 Changing over between Miles / Kilometers....110
Automatic Anti-Glare Interior Mirror and Door Individual Light Functions ...............................74 Tachometer................................................111
Mirror .......................................................... 31 Welcome Home Lighting................................74 Turn Signal Indicator Light ...........................111
Rear Window Defogger, Door Mirror Heating... 32 Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment ...........74 High Beam Indicator Light............................111
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints ............. 33 Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer / Upshift indicator..........................................111
Heated Seats ............................................... 36 Parking light / Flasher Lever ..........................75 Cooling System ..........................................112
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................ 36 Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever ...................76 Fuel ...........................................................113
Sun Visors.................................................... 37 Automatic Speed Control...............................78 Clock .........................................................114
Safety Belts.................................................. 38 Cupholder ....................................................80 Outside Temperature...................................114
Airbag Systems ............................................ 41 Ashtray ........................................................81 Engine Oil Pressure.....................................115
Child Restraint Systems ................................ 47 Cigarette Lighter...........................................82 Check Engine (Emission Control) ..................116
LATCH System Storage in the Passenger Compartment .........83 On-Board Computer (BC) .............................117
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat..... 51 Luggage Compartment Lid and Engine Warnings on the instrument panel and the
Child Restraint Anchorages............................ 52 Compartment Lid ..........................................85 on-board computer......................................148
Clutch Pedal ................................................. 53 Luggage Compartment .................................86 Manual Transmission, Clutch........................155
Parking Brake............................................... 53 Trunk Entrapment .........................................88 Upshift indicator..........................................155

Table of Contents 9
10_GT3_21.book Seite 10 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Exercise Extreme Caution when Working Replacing the remote-control battery ............216
on your Vehicle ........................................... 157 Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables .......217
Coolant Level .............................................158 Bulb chart ..................................................219
Engine Oil................................................... 159 Lights, Replacing Bulbs ...............................219
Engine Oil Level .......................................... 160 Headlights ..................................................220
Brake Fluid Level ........................................ 162 License Plate Light......................................227
Fuel Economy.............................................164 Front Side Lights, Front Turn Signal Lights,
Operating your Porsche in other Countries.... 164 Daytime Running Lights, Tail Lights and
Fuel ........................................................... 165 Additional Brake Light..................................227
Fuel Recommendations ............................... 166 Adjusting Headlights....................................228
Portable Fuel Containers ............................. 167 Towing .......................................................230
Fuel Evaporation Control ............................. 167 Vehicle Identification....................................234
Emission Control System............................. 168 Technical Data............................................236
How Emission Control Works ....................... 169 Engine Diagram at full Power .......................242
Washer Fluid............................................... 170
Power Steering........................................... 171
Air Filter ..................................................... 172
Combination Filter....................................... 172
Manual Transmission Oil .............................. 172
Wiper Blades .............................................. 173
Car Care Instructions .................................. 174
Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ........................................... 183
Tires/Wheels .............................................. 184
Loading Information .................................... 195
Wheels with Central Locking ........................ 197
Central Bolts .............................................. 197
Changing a Wheel ....................................... 198
Checking Tire Pressure with a
Pressure Gauge.......................................... 203
Flat Tire ..................................................... 203
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform or
Garage Lift ................................................. 206
Electrical System........................................ 207
Battery....................................................... 211

10 Table of Contents
10_GT3_21.book Seite 11 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Dear Porsche Owner Before driving off... f If a child will be riding in the vehicle, check
child seat/child seat restraint system to ensure
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your that restraints are properly adjusted.
Porsche, including advanced engineering, rigid Check the following items first
f Child restraint systems will not fit into the
quality control and demanding inspections.
f Turn the engine off before you attempt any Sports bucket seat.
These engineering and safety features will be
checks or repairs on the vehicle. Do not install a child restraint system in the
enhanced by you...
Sports bucket seat.
f Be sure the tires are inflated correctly.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped
the safe driver... Check tires for damage and tire wear.
with the LATCH system and thus the airbag
f See that wheel bolts are properly tightened system cannot be manually deactivated.
– who knows his/her car and all controls, and not loose or missing.
f Check all exterior and interior lights for opera-
– who maintains the vehicle properly, f Check engine oil level, add if necessary. tion and that the lenses are clean.
Make it a habit to have engine oil checked with
– who uses driving skills wisely and always f Check the headlights for proper aim, and if
drives within her/his own capabilities and the every refueling.
necessary, have them adjusted.
level of familiarity with the vehicle. f Check all fluid levels such as windshield
f Check under the vehicle for leaks.
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to washer and brake fluid levels.
f Be sure all luggage is stowed securely.
perform most of the checks listed on the following f Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and
pages. cranks the engine properly.
If in doubt, have these checks performed by your Emergency equipment
authorized Porsche dealer. f Check all doors and lids for proper operation
and latch them properly. It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
f Check, and if necessary replace worn or in your vehicle.
cracked wiper blades. Some of the items you should have are:
window scraper, snow brush, container or bag of
f See that all windows are clear and sand or salt, emergency light, small shovel, first-
unobstructed. aid kit, etc.
f Check air intake slots and area between
luggage compartment lid and windshield.
Ensure that these areas are free of snow and
ice, so the heater and the windshield wipers
work properly.

Before driving off... 11


10_GT3_21.book Seite 12 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

In the driver’s seat... On the road... f When parked, always set the parking brake.
Move the gearshift lever to reverse or first
f Check operation of the horn. f Never drive after you have consumed alcohol gear.
or drugs. On hills also turn the front wheels toward the
f Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
curb.
controls. f Always have your safety belt fastened.
To reduce the possibility of injury from the f When emergency repairs become necessary,
f Always drive defensively.
airbag deployment, you should always sit back move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the
Expect the unexpected.
as far from the steering wheel as is practical, emergency flasher and use other warning
while still maintaining full vehicle control. f Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes. devices to alert other motorists. Do not park
or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot
f Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors. f Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving
exhaust system may come in contact with dry
conditions warrant it.
f Buckle your safety belts. grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable
f Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle in material.
f Check operation of the foot and parking brake.
front of you, depending on traffic, road and
f Make it a habit to have the engine oil checked
f Check all warning and indicator lights with weather conditions.
after every refueling.
ignition on and engine not running.
f Reduce speed at night and during inclement
f Start engine and check all warning displays for weather.
warning symbols. Driving in wet weather requires caution and
reduced speeds, particularly on roads with
f Never leave an idling car unattended.
standing water, as the handling characteristics
f Lock doors from inside, especially with of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydropla-
children in the car to prevent inadvertent ning of the tires.
opening of doors from inside or outside.
f Always observe speed limits and obey road
Drive with doors locked.
signs and traffic laws.
f When tired, get well off the road, stop and take
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the
vehicle with engine idling.
Please see the chapter “ENGINE EXHAUST” on
Page 8.

12 Before driving off...


10_GT3_21.book Seite 13 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Break in hints for the first f Do not participate in motor racing events, Engine oil and fuel consumption
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers 2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers. During the break-in period oil and fuel consump-
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining tion may be higher than normal.
There may be a slight stiffness in the steering,
optimum performance from your new Porsche. gear-shifting or other controls during the break-in f Please see the chapter “TECHNICAL DATA” on
Despite the most modern, high-precision manufac- period which will gradually disappear. Page 236.
turing methods, the moving parts must still wear As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
in with each other. This wearing-in occurs mainly in Break in brake pads and brake discs the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
the first 2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers. the engine is operated, the climate and road
New brake pads and discs have to be “broken in”, conditions, as well as the amount of dilution and
and therefore only attain optimal friction when the
Therefore: oxidation of the lubricant.
car has covered several hundred miles or km.
f Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
f Preferably take longer trips. The slightly reduced braking ability must be
compensated for by pressing the brake pedal refueling, add if necessary.
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance harder. This also applies whenever the brake pads
driving whenever possible. and brake discs are replaced.
f Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops. A significant amount of brake noise may be heard
during the break-in period.
f Do not exceed maximum engine speed of
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute).
New tires
f Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in
Neutral or in gear. New tires do not have maximum traction. They
tend to be slippery.
f Do not let the engine labor, especially when
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in f Break in new tires by driving at moderate
time (use the most favorable rpm range). speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles/100 to
200 km. Longer braking distances must be
f Never lug the engine in high gear at low
anticipated.
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
during the break-in period.

Before driving off... 13


10_GT3_21.book Seite 14 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

1 Inner door handle, Page 21


2 Power windows, Page 28
3 Door mirror control, Page 30
4 Diagnostic socket (OBD)
5 Lid release, Page 85
6 Steering-wheel adjustment, Page 36

14 Before driving off...


10_GT3_21.book Seite 15 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

1 Light switch, Page 73


2 Ignition lock/steering lock, Page 67
3 Turn signal/headlight dimmer,
flasher lever, Page 75
4 Operating lever for on-board computer,
Page 117
5 Horn
6 Operating lever for automatic speed control,
Page 78
7 Wiper/washer lever, Page 76
8 Stopwatch, Page 127
9 Interior temperature sensor
10 Emergency flasher switch, Page 72
11 Central locking button, readiness display for
alarm system, Page 24
12 Cupholder, Page 80
13 Operating panel for air conditioning, Page 98
14 Buttons for Porsche Active Suspension
Management (PASM), Page 63
Sport mode, Page 62
Front axle lift system, Page 64
Porsche Stability Management (PSM), Page 59
15 Operating panel for radio or
Porsche Communication Management (PCM),
see separate Owner’s Manual

Before driving off... 15


10_GT3_21.book Seite 16 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Operation, Safety
Engine Exhaust ............................................... 8 Brakes .........................................................54 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)...89
Dear Porsche Owner ..................................... 11 ABS Brake System Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms...........91
Before driving off... ....................................... 11 (Antilock Brake System).................................57 iPod, USB and AUX .......................................93
In the driver’s seat... ..................................... 12 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)..............59 Fire Extinguisher ...........................................94
On the road... ............................................... 12 Sport mode ..................................................62 HomeLink.....................................................95
Break in hints for the first Porsche Active Suspension Management
2,000 miles/3,000 kilometers....................... 13 (PASM).........................................................63
Never invite car theft! .................................... 17 Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) ..................63
Keys ............................................................ 18 Front Axle Lift System ...................................64
Key with Radio Remote Control ...................... 19 Interior Lights ...............................................66
Doors .......................................................... 21 Ignition/Starter Switch with
Central Locking ............................................ 22 anti-theft Steering Lock .................................67
Alarm System, Starting Procedures ......................................70
Passenger Compartment Monitoring .............. 26 Stopping Engine ...........................................71
Power Windows ............................................ 28 Emergency Flasher Switch.............................72
Door mirrors ................................................ 30 Light Switch .................................................73
Inside mirror................................................. 31 Dynamic Cornering Light ...............................74
Automatic Anti-Glare Interior Mirror and Door Individual Light Functions ...............................74
Mirror .......................................................... 31 Welcome Home Lighting................................74
Rear Window Defogger, Door Mirror Heating... 32 Automatic Headlight Beam Adjustment ...........74
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints ............. 33 Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer /
Heated Seats ............................................... 36 Parking light / Flasher Lever ..........................75
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................ 36 Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever ...................76
Sun Visors.................................................... 37 Automatic Speed Control...............................78
Safety Belts.................................................. 38 Cupholder ....................................................80
Airbag Systems ............................................ 41 Ashtray ........................................................81
Child Restraint Systems ................................ 47 Cigarette Lighter...........................................82
LATCH System Storage in the Passenger Compartment .........83
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s seat..... 51 Luggage Compartment Lid and Engine
Child Restraint Anchorages............................ 52 Compartment Lid ..........................................85
Clutch Pedal ................................................. 53 Luggage Compartment .................................86
Parking Brake............................................... 53 Trunk Entrapment .........................................88

16 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 17 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Never invite car theft! Warning! To protect your vehicle and your possessions
from theft, you should always proceed as
Risk of a serious accident.
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock follows when leaving your vehicle:
The steering column will lock when you
invites car theft.
remove the key while you are driving or as f Close windows.
A steering wheel lock and a gong alarm are the car is rolling to a stop. You will not be
f Remove ignition key.
standard equipment in your Porsche. able to steer the car.
The gong alarm will sound if you open the driver’s Serious personal injury or death could result f Engage steering lock.
door while the key is still in the ignition lock. It is from loss of control of the vehicle.
f Lock glove compartment.
your reminder to pull the key out of the ignition
f Never remove the key from the steering lock
lock and to lock the doors. f Remove valuables (e.g. car documents, cell
while you are driving.
phones, house keys) from the car.
Warning! f Lock doors.
Any uncontrolled movement of the vehicle
may result in property damage, serious
personal injury or death.
Never leave your vehicle unattended with the
key in the ignition lock, especially if children
and/or pets are left unattended in the
vehicle. They can operate power windows
and other controls. If the engine is left
running, they may accidentally engage the
shift lever. Serious personal injury or death
could result from loss of control of the
vehicle.
f Always remove the ignition key.
f Always set the parking brake.
f Lock the doors with the remote control.

Operation, Safety 17
10_GT3_21.book Seite 18 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Keys Replacement keys Immobilizer


f Please see the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM, Replacement car keys can be obtained only from There is a transponder (an electronic component)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING” your authorized Porsche dealer, and this can in the key grip, containing a stored code.
on Page 26. sometimes be very time-consuming. When the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
You should therefore always keep a spare key on checks the code.
f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING”
your person. The immobilizer can be deactivated and the
on Page 22.
Keep it in a safe place (e.g. wallet), but under no engine started only using an authorized ignition
Two car keys are supplied with your Porsche. circumstances in or on the vehicle. key.
These keys operate all the locks on your vehicle.
The key codes of new keys have to be “reported” Switching off the immobilizer
f Be careful with your car keys: do not part with to the car control unit by your authorized Porsche
them except under exceptional circumstances. dealer. f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock.

f To avoid battery run-down, always remove the A total of 6 car keys can be reported to the control If the ignition is left on for more than 2 minutes
ignition key from the ignition lock. unit. without the engine being started, the immobilizer
is switched on again.
Disabling key codes
Emergency operation f If this happens, turn the ignition key back to
If a key is lost, the key codes can be disabled by position 3 (ignition off) before starting the
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERA- an authorized Porsche dealer. engine. The immobilizer is deactivated again,
TION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on All the remaining car keys are required for this and the engine can be started.
Page 69. purpose.
f Please see the chapter “IGNITION/STARTER
Disabling the code ensures that the car can be
SWITCH WITH ANTI-THEFT STEERING LOCK”
started only using authorized keys.
on Page 67.
Note
Switching on the immobilizer
f Please note that the other locks can still be
f Remove ignition key.
opened with the disabled key.

18 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 19 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Key with Radio Remote Control Unlocking luggage compartment lid


f Press button 2 for approx. two seconds.
Unlocking the vehicle
If the vehicle was locked, it is unlocked simultane-
f Press button 1. ously with the luggage compartment.
The vehicle will be locked again approx.
Locking the vehicle 15 seconds after the luggage compartment is
closed if none of the doors was opened.
f Press button 1.
Note
Switching off the alarm system if it is Your authorized Porsche dealer can program
triggered accidentally further types of unlocking for the luggage
f Press button 1. compartment.

Type 1
The relocking time of the doors can be adjusted to
suit your individual requirements:
1 - Central locking button 10 - 100 seconds.
2 - Luggage compartment lid button
3 - Light-emitting diode Type 2
The doors stay locked when the luggage compart-
ment is unlocked.

Operation, Safety 19
10_GT3_21.book Seite 20 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

The remote-control standby function Operational readiness of the remote


switches off after 7 days control interrupted
If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the Encoded data is transmitted to the vehicle each
remote control within 7 days, the remote control time the wireless remote control is operated. If the
standby function is switched off (to prevent remote control is operated too often outside the
discharging of the vehicle battery). range of the vehicle, this can result in the central
locking system no longer responding.
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
In this case, the remote control and vehicle must
key at the door lock.
be synchronized.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered. Carrying out the synchronization
2. Press button 1 on the remote control. 1. Unlock the driver's door with the key at the
The remote control is now activated again and door lock.
the alarm system is switched off.
2. Open driver’s door and insert the ignition key
into the ignition lock within 10 seconds to
prevent the alarm system from being
triggered.
3. With the key inserted, press and hold button 1
on the remote control for approx. 5 seconds.
The synchronization is now complete.

20 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 21 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Door storage tray


Opening storage tray
f Open the cover C.
Keep the door storage tray C closed while driving
for safety reasons.

Doors Opening unlocked doors from inside


If the door windows are closed, they will be f Slowly pull door handle B.
automatically opened by a few millimeters when
the doors are opened and, when the doors are
Opening locked doors from inside
closed, they will be closed again. This makes it
easier to open and close the doors and protects f Slowly pull door handle B twice.
the seals.
f Please see the chapter “LOCKING CONDI-
f Therefore, you should pull the door handle TIONS” on Page 23.
slowly so that the door window can be lowered
before the door is opened.

Opening doors from outside


f Unlock vehicle with the remote control.
f Slowly pull door handle A.

Operation, Safety 21
10_GT3_21.book Seite 22 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Central Locking Both car doors and the filler flap can be centrally Automatic relocking
unlocked or locked with the remote control.
This device complies with: If the car is unlocked by remote control and none
The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver’s door is
Part 15 of the FCC Rules of the car doors is opened within approx.
not completely closed.
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. 60 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
A short signal from the alarm horn will draw This relocking time can be adapted to your indivi-
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
your attention to the fact that the following dual requirements (10 - 100 seconds) by an autho-
tions:
components are not completely closed when you rized Porsche dealer.
1. This device may not cause harmful interfe- try to lock the vehicle:
rence, and
– Passenger’s door
2. this device must accept any interference
– Luggage compartment lid
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. – Engine compartment lid

Note – Glove compartment

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the door
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi- lock and opening the door may activate the alarm
cations to this equipment. system within 10 seconds.
Such modification could void the user’s authority
Note
to operate the equipment.
f On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Warning! Plus, the PCM can be used to activate
automatic door locking.
Any changes or modifications not expressly Please see the chapter “Individual Memory” in
approved by Porsche could void the user’s autho- the separate PCM Owner’s Manual.
rity to operate this equipment.

f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF


AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 208.

22 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 23 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Locking conditions Malfunction of the remote control Emergency operation – closing


f Lock car once. The remote control may not function correctly due f Lock the driver’s door with the key at the door
The doors cannot be opened from the outside. to local radio wave interference. The vehicle will lock.
Alarm system and passenger compartment then not lock properly. If there is a defect in the central locking
monitoring are switched on. This can be identified by the missing locking system, all functioning elements of the central
sound and the missing check-back signal of the locking system will be locked.
If a person or animal remains in the vehicle: emergency flasher. The alarm system is switched on.
f Quickly lock car twice. If this should occur:
The passenger compartment monitoring
The doors cannot be opened from the outside. system is switched off.
The passenger compartment monitoring is f Lock the vehicle with the key in the door.
The fault should be remedied immediately at an
switched off. authorized Porsche dealer.
Emergency operation – opening
Unlocking the door with the inner door
handle f Unlock the driver’s door with the key at the
door lock.
Any person remaining in the locked car can open
Open door within 20 seconds and insert the
the door with the inner door handle:
ignition key into the ignition lock within
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door 10 seconds to prevent the alarm system from
lock. being triggered.
2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Note on operation
Note If the door is not opened within approx.
20 seconds, automatic relocking takes place.
f Inform any person remaining in the car that the
The alarm system will be triggered by the next
alarm system will be triggered if the door is
unlocking of the door:
opened.
f Insert the ignition key into the ignition lock to
switch off the alarm system.

Operation, Safety 23
10_GT3_21.book Seite 24 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Indication by emergency flasher and Locking


alarm horn f Press the central locking button.
Indicator light in the button lights up if ignition
If the remote control is used for unlocking or
is on.
locking, a response is provided by the emergency
flasher: Unlocking
– Unlocking – single flash. f Press the central locking button.
– Locking – double flash. Indicator light goes out.

– Locking twice – continuous illumination for If the doors were locked with the central locking
approx. 2 seconds. button, they can be opened by pulling the inner
door handle:
Fault indication 1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
lock.
A double horn signal during locking indicates a
defect in the central locking or alarm system. 2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
Have the defect remedied at an authorized
Porsche dealer.
Central locking button
Overload protection The central locking button on the dashboard lets
you lock and unlock both doors electrically.
If the central locking system is operated more
than ten times within a minute, further operation is Note
blocked for 30 seconds.
If the doors are locked with the key or remote
control, they can not be opened by pressing the
central locking button.

24 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 25 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Automatic door locking Type 3 Warning!


Doors lock automatically when the ignition is In an emergency situation where you need to
Your authorized Porsche dealer can program
switched on. If doors are opened with the engine exit the car through an automatically locked
diverse types of automatic door locking in the
running, they lock again automatically when a door, remember the following procedure to
control unit of the central locking system:
speed of 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded. open the door.
Type 1
Type 4 f Unlock the doors by pressing the central
Doors lock automatically when the ignition is locking button or
The doors do not lock automatically.
switched on. f pull the inside door handle twice to open the
Note door.
Type 2
Automatically locked doors can be unlocked with
Doors lock automatically when a speed of
the central locking button or opened by pulling on
3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h) is exceeded.
the inside door handle twice.
f On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
Plus, the PCM can be used to activate
automatic door locking.
Please see the chapter “Individual Memory” in
the separate PCM Owner’s Manual.

Operation, Safety 25
10_GT3_21.book Seite 26 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

2. this device must accept any interference Function indication


received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. If the alarm system is activated, light-emitting
diode A in the central locking switch flashes.
Note
If, after locking, the light-emitting diode does not
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio flash or, after ten seconds, it emits double
or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifi- flashes, then not all alarm contacts are closed.
cations to this equipment. Additionally, a brief horn signal sounds.
Such modification could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. When the doors are unlocked, the alarm system
and passenger compartment monitoring system
are switched off and the light-emitting diode goes
Warning!
off.
Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by Porsche could void the user’s autho-
rity to operate this equipment.

The alarm system and passenger compartment


A - Light-emitting diode for alarm system monitoring system are switched on when the
doors are locked with the key or remote control.
Alarm System, f Please see the chapter “CENTRAL LOCKING”
Passenger Compartment on Page 22.
Monitoring Unlocking the vehicle by using the key in the
door lock and opening the door may activate
This device complies with:
the alarm system within 10 seconds.
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Switching off the alarm system if it is
Operation is subject to the following two condi- triggered accidentally
tions:
f Unlock the vehicle with the remote control.
1. This device may not cause harmful interfe-
rence, and The alarm system and passenger compartment
monitoring system are switched off automatically
when the doors are unlocked.

26 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 27 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

When the alarm is armed, the following Deactivating the passenger compartment Fault indication
areas are monitored monitoring system for one locking
process A double horn signal during locking indicates a
– Doors defect in the central locking or alarm system.
If a person or animal remains in the car while it is
– Luggage compartment lid f Have the defect remedied at an authorized
locked, the passenger compartment monitoring
Porsche dealer.
– Engine compartment lid system must be switched off.
– Glove compartment f Quickly lock car twice.
The doors are locked but can be opened from
– Passenger compartment
the inside:
If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted, the
1. Pull inner door handle once to unlock door
alarm horn sounds for approximately 3 minutes.
lock.
Additionally, the emergency flasher flashes and
the passenger compartment light lightes for 2. Pull inner door handle again to open door.
approximately five minutes.
When the alarm is triggered, the light-emitting Note
diode changes over to double flashes. f Inform any person remaining in the car that the
In order not to limit the action range of the alarm system will be triggered if the door is
passenger compartment monitoring system: opened.

f Do not fold the front seat backrests forward.

Operation, Safety 27
10_GT3_21.book Seite 28 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Power Windows Readiness for operation of power windows


– When the ignition is switched on
Warning!
(engine switched on or off) or
Risk of injury when the door windows close.
– with doors closed and ignition key withdrawn,
This applies especially if the windows are
but only until door is first opened.
closed with the one-touch operation,
One-touch operation for closing the door
because with this function the window goes
windows is available only when the ignition is
up automatically.
switched on.
f Make sure that fingers, hands, arms or other
parts are not in the way when the windows are
closed.
f Remove the ignition key to shut off power to
the window switches when the vehicle is not
attended by a responsible person. Uninformed
persons could injure themselves by operating
the power windows.
A - Power window in driver’s door f Do not leave children in the car unattended.
B - Power window in passenger’s door
Risk of an accident.
f Do not put anything on or near the windows
that may interfere with the driver’s vision.

28 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 29 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Opening/closing windows Anti-crushing protection Automatic window lowering


The two rocker switches A and B in the driver’s If a side window is blocked during closing, it will f Please see the chapter “DOORS” on Page 21.
door and the switch in the passenger’s door have stop and open again by about an inch.
a two-stage function:
Storing end position of the windows
Opening Warning!
If the battery is disconnected and reconnected,
f Press the rocker switch down to the first stage Risk of serious personal injuries.
the windows will not be raised automatically when
until the window has reached the desired If the rocker switch is pressed again within
the door is closed.
position. 10 seconds of the window being blocked, the
window will close with its full closing force. 1. Close the windows with the rocker switch
Closing Anti-crushing protection is disabled. once.
f Press the rocker switch upwards to the first f Once the anti-crushing protection acts to stop 2. Press the rocker switch upwards again to store
stage until the window has reached the desired the window and opens it slightly, do not press the end position of the windows in the control
position. the rocker switch again within 10 seconds unit.
without checking to make sure that nothing is
One-touch operation blocking the path of the window.
f Press the rocker switch upwards or The window will close with full closing force.
downwards to the second stage.
Window moves to its final position. One-touch operation is disabled for 10 seconds
Press again to stop the window in the desired after blockage of a side window.
position.
One-touch operation for closing the passenger’s
window is available once the window is approxima-
tely half-way closed.

Operation, Safety 29
10_GT3_21.book Seite 30 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
f Do not put anything on or near the windows or
the mirrors that may interfere with the driver’s
vision.

Adjusting
1. Switch on ignition.
2. By turning the control switch A, select the
driver’s side or the passenger’s side.
3. Move the door mirror glasses in the approp-
riate direction by tilting the control switch.

If the electrical adjustment facility fails


Door mirrors Folding in door mirrors
f Adjust mirror by pressing on the mirror face.
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the outside and Warning!
inside mirrors.
It is important for safe driving that you have clear, Risk of injury to fingers if the mirror acciden-
unobstructed vision to the rear. tally flips back when being folded in.
f Exercise extreme caution when folding in
mirror by hand. Do not let go of the mirror
before the locking lever is locked or the mirror
is fully unfolded.

30 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 31 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

1. Push mirror towards the door window and Inside mirror A - Sensor
continue to hold it (high spring force). B - Switch for automatic anti-glare operation
When the mirror is being adjusted, the anti-glare C - Light-emitting diode
2. Swivel the locking lever up to the stop and lever A must point forward.
slowly let go of the mirror.
Basic position: lever forward Automatic Anti-Glare Interior
Anti-glare position: lever back Mirror and Door Mirror
Unfolding door mirrors
Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
1. Push mirror towards the door window and mirror measure the incident light.
continue to hold it (high spring force). The The mirrors automatically change to anti-glare
locking lever disengages automatically. position or revert to their normal state, depending
2. Move mirror back to unfolded position by hand. on the light intensity.
Do not let go of the mirror beforehand. When reverse gear is selected, automatic anti-
glare operation is switched off.

Operation, Safety 31
10_GT3_21.book Seite 32 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Note Switching on
The incident light in the area of the sensors must
f Press button.
not be restricted, e.g. by stickers on the
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
windshield.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heater switches off
Switching off the automatic anti-glare automatically.
operation The heater can be switched back on by pressing
f Press switch B. the button again.
Light-emitting diode C goes out.
Switching off
Switching on the automatic anti-glare
operation f Press button.
f Press switch B.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.
Light-emitting diode C lights up.

Warning!
Risk of injury. Electrolyte fluid can emerge Rear Window Defogger,
from a broken mirror glass. Door Mirror Heating
This fluid irritates the skin and eyes.
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact
The mirror heater is ready for operation when the
ignition is on.
with the eyes or skin, immediately rinse it off
with clean water.
See a doctor if necessary.
Risk of damage to the paintwork, leather and
plastic parts. Electrolyte fluid can be
removed only while it is still wet.
f Clean the affected parts with water.

32 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 33 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Seat Adjustment and Head Caution! Seat position


Restraints Risk of damage to windshield, sun visor, etc.
An ergonomically correct sitting position is
when the seat is adjusted or folded back or
important for safe and fatigue-free driving.
Warning! forward.
We recommend the following procedure for adjus-
The seat may move unexpectedly if you f Adjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not ting the driver’s seat to suit individual
attempt to adjust while driving. This could in contact with any other object. requirements:
cause sudden loss of control, resulting in 1. Adjust the seat until, with the clutch pedal fully
serious personal injury or death. The driver and passenger seat provide integrated
depressed, your leg remains at a slight angle.
head restraints in the backrests. The head
f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in restraints are not adjustable. 2. Rest your outstretched arm on the steering
motion. wheel.
The backrest locks must be engaged at all Set the backrest angle (not applicable for
Warning!
times while the vehicle is in motion. Sports bucket seat) and the steering-wheel
All occupants, including the driver, should not position so that your wrist rests on the outer
Safety belts only offer protection when the
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the rim of the steering wheel. At the same time,
backrest is upright and the belts are properly
head restraints and backrests, respectively, are the shoulders must still be in noticeable
positioned on the body.
placed in their proper positions so that the risk of contact with the backrest.
Improperly positioned safety belts or safety
neck injuries is minimized in the event of a crash.
belts worn by passengers in an excessively 3. Adjust the seat height (not applicable for
reclined position can cause serious personal For proper positioning of the head restraint, the Sports bucket seat) to give yourself enough
injury or death in an accident. seatback's inclination should be adjusted such headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
that the head restraint is in an upright position.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or 4. Electrically adjustable seat:
Driver and passengers should be seated upright
passenger backrests excessively reclined Adjust the seat angle until your thighs rest
and in the center of their seats.
(see “Seat position”). lightly on the seat cushion.
Risk of injury if persons or animals are in the
movement range of the seat during seat
adjustment.
f Adjust the seat so that no one is put at risk.

Operation, Safety 33
10_GT3_21.book Seite 34 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

C Backrest angle
f Operate switch C until the desired backrest
angle is reached.
H Seat backrest
f Folding forward: Pull up lever H in the side
part of the backrest and fold the backrest
forward.
f Folding back: Tilt back and engage the
backrest so that it cannot tip forward when the
car is braked.

Adaptive sports seat


Sports seat
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
A Seat height
the arrow until the desired setting is reached.
f Use lever A in a pumping movement:
A Seat height adjustment
Upwards – seat moves upwards
Downwards – seat moves downwards B Fore-and-aft position adjustment
B Fore and aft C Seat angle adjustment
f Raise locking lever B. D Backrest angle adjustment
Move seat to desired position and release
lever.
Ensure that the seat engages correctly.

34 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 35 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

E Lumbar support A Fore and aft adjustment


(pelvis and spinal column support)
f Raise locking lever A.
To permit a relaxed sitting posture, the backrest Move seat to desired position and release
curvature is continuously adjustable in vertical and lever.
horizontal directions for individual pelvis and Ensure that the seat engages correctly.
spinal column support.
B Backrest
f Press the switch in the direction indicated by
f Folding forward: Pull loop B in the side part
the arrow until the desired backrest curvature
of the backrest and fold the backrest forward.
is reached.
f Folding back: Tilt back and engage the
F Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
backrest so that it cannot tip forward when the
f Push forward or pull backward switch F until car is braked.
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of
the body.
G Adjusting the seat cushion side bolsters
f Push forward or pull backward switch G until
the side bolsters are adjusted to the shape of Sports bucket seat
the body.
Child restraint systems will not fit into the
H Seat backrest Sports bucket seat.
f Folding forward: Pull up lever H in the side f Do not install a child restraint system in the
part of the backrest and fold the backrest Sports bucket seat.
forward.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be equipped with
f Folding back: Tilt back and engage the the LATCH system and thus the airbag system
backrest so that it cannot tip forward when the cannot be manually deactivated.
car is braked.

Operation, Safety 35
10_GT3_21.book Seite 36 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Switching on Steering Wheel Adjustment


High heating power
Warning!
f Press button once.
Risk of accident.
Both light-emitting diodes in the button
The steering wheel may move further than
light up.
desired if you attempt to adjust it when
Low heating power driving.
You can lose control of the vehicle, causing
f Press button twice. serious personal injury or death.
One light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
f Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
Switching off
f Press button as often as necessary until the
light-emitting diodes go out.

A - Seat heating, left


B - Seat heating, right

Heated Seats
Two-stage seat heating is ready for operation
when the engine is running.

36 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 37 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Sun Visors
f Swing the sun visors down to prevent glare
from the front.
f To prevent glare from the side, unclip the sun
visor from the inner bracket and swivel round
so that it is in front of the door window.

Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
covered by a lid.

Warning!
Risk of injury in an accident.
f Keep the lid closed while driving.
Adjusting steering wheel height and The vanity mirror illumination is switched on
Risk of damage.
longitudinal direction automatically when the cover is opened (arrow).
f Do not force the lid beyond its end position.
1. Insert ignition key fully into ignition lock.
2. Push the locking lever downwards.
3. Adjust steering wheel to fit the chosen
backrest angle and your seat position by
moving the steering wheel up or down and
longitudinally.
4. Swivel locking lever back until you feel it
engage.
If necessary, move steering wheel slightly
longitudinally.

Operation, Safety 37
10_GT3_21.book Seite 38 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Safety Belts f Belts should not be worn twisted. f The belts must be kept clean or the retractors
may not work properly.
f Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable
Warning! Please see the chapter “CAR CARE INSTRUC-
objects in or on your clothing, such as eye
TIONS” on Page 174.
Always make sure your and your passenger’s glasses, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause
safety belts are properly fastened while injury. f Never bleach or dye safety belts.
seated in the vehicle. f Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere f Do not allow safety belts to retract until they
Failure to follow safety belt warnings may with proper positioning of belts. are completely dry after cleaning or this may
result in serious personal injury or death. cause damage to the belt.
f Belts must not rub against sharp objects or
f For your and your passenger’s protection, use damage may occur to the belt.
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in
f Two occupants should never share the same Belt tensioner
motion.
belt at the same time.
f Use appropriate child restraint systems for all Depending on the force of an impact, fastened
Care and maintenance safety belts are tightened in an accident.
small children.
f Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that
Proper wearing of safety belts The belt tensioners are triggered in:
may prevent a secure locking.
f Safety belts must be positioned on the body as – Front, side and rear impacts of sufficient
f Belts that have been subjected to excessive
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding severity.
stretch forces in an accident must be
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts
inspected or replaced to ensure their conti- Note
can cause serious personal injury or death in
nued effectiveness in restraining you.
case of an accident. The belt-tensioner system can be triggered only
The same applies to belt tensioner systems
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your which have been triggered. once; the system must be replaced afterward.
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be In addition, the anchor points of the belts If there is a fault in the belt-tensioner system, the
worn behind your back or under your arm. should be checked. airbag warning light lights up.
f For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt f If safety belts do not work properly, see your Work may be performed on the belt-tensioner
should be worn low across the hips. authorized Porsche dealer immediately. system only by an authorized Porsche dealer.
f Pregnant women should position the belt as f If the belts show damage to webbing, bindings, Smoke is released when the belt tensioners are
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it buckles or retractors, they should be replaced triggered. This does not indicate a fire in the
is not pressing against the abdomen. to ensure safe operation. vehicle.
f Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts
in your vehicle.

38 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 39 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Safety Belt Warning System Fastening the safety belt


f Assume a comfortable sitting position.
An audio-visual warning system is intercon-
Please see the chapter “SEAT POSITION” on
nected with the driver’s safety belt.
Page 33.
Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your
sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be
passenger to buckle up.
worn behind your back or under your arm.
In addition, the gong will sound for approx.
90 seconds if vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph/ f Grasp belt and pull the belt in a continuous
24 km/h. slow motion across your chest and lap.
The safety belt warning lights in the instrument
f Insert belt tongue into buckle on inboard side
panel and on-board computer will go off as soon
of seat. Push down until it securely locks with
as the driver has buckled up.
an audible click. Pull the belt to check.
f Pull shoulder section to make sure belt fits
snugly across the pelvis.
f Belts should fit snugly across the pelvis and
Inertia reel retractor chest. Make sure there is no slack in the belt.
The combination lap/shoulder belt with inertia reel
locking mechanism adjusts automatically to your Releasing the safety belt
size and movements as long as the pull on the belt
is slow. f Push in release button (arrow) on buckle. Belt
tongue will spring out of buckle.
Rapid deceleration during hard braking or a colli-
sion locks the belt. The belt will also lock when you f To release a latched belt, lean back to take the
drive up or down a steep hill or in a sharp curve, body pressure off the belt.
otherwise, the shoulder belt will not inhibit your f To store lap/shoulder belt, allow the belt to
upper body movement. retract as you guide the latch to its stowed
position.
f Please see the chapter “AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR” on Page 50.

Operation, Safety 39
10_GT3_21.book Seite 40 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Adjusting belt height


f Upward – push belt deflector up.
f Downward – press button (arrow) and move
belt deflector.

Cleaning the safety belts


f Please see the chapter “SAFETY BELTS” on
Page 180.

Safety belt height adjustment


The height of the belt deflectors for the driver’s
seat and passenger’s seat can be adjusted.
Adjust the height of the safety belt so that it runs
across the middle of the shoulder, not against the
neck.

40 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 41 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Airbag Systems Danger! f Always keep the lid of the door storage
compartment closed. Objects must not
To provide optimal occupant protection,
The airbags in combination with the safety belts protrude out of the door storage compart-
airbags must inflate at very high speed. If
make up a safety system which offers the driver ment.
you are not wearing your safety belt or are
and the passenger the greatest known protection
too close to the airbag when it is deployed, f Do not add any additional coverings or stickers
from injuries in case of accident.
inflating airbags can result in serious to the steering wheel or in the area of the
Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing
personal injury or death. passenger’s airbag, side airbags and head
system for the passenger's seat in accordance
airbags. Doing so may adversely affect the
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard f Make sure there are no people, animals or
functioning of the airbag system or cause
208. objects between the driver or passenger and
harm to the occupants if the airbag system
the area into which the airbag inflates.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the should deploy.
safety belts must be worn at all times, f Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering Do not use protective seat covers.
because the front airbag system is only deployed wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full
f Do not modify the seat coverings. Do not
by frontal collisions with an impact of sufficient vehicle control.
attach additional cushions, protective cover-
severity.
f Always hold the steering wheel by the outer ings, or pillows to the passenger's seat. Do not
Below the deployment threshold of the airbag rim. Never rest your hands on the airbag panel. affix things to the passenger's seat or cover it
system, and during types of collisions which do with other materials. Do not cover the back of
f Always fasten seat belts because triggering
not cause the actuation of the system, the safety the backrest. Do not make changes to the
of the airbag system depends on the force and
belts provide the primary protection to the occup- passenger's seat and to the seat base frame.
angle of impact.
ants when correctly worn.
f No changes may be made to the wiring or
Therefore, all persons within the vehicle f Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of
components of the airbag system.
must wear safety belts at all times (in many the passenger’s seat. These could impair the
states, state law requires the use of safety belts). function of the airbag, the seat belts, and f Do not install any wiring for electrical acces-
weight sensing. sory equipment in the vicinity of the airbag
f Please see the chapter “SAFETY BELTS” on
wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable the
Page 38. f Do not hang objects (e.g. jackets, coats, coat
airbag system or cause inadvertent inflation.
hangers) over the backrest.
The front airbags are located under the padded
f If the warning light comes on, the airbag
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side and, on
system should be repaired immediately by
the passenger's side, in the dashboard.
your authorized Porsche dealer.
The side airbags for the front seats are installed
on the side in the seat backrests.
The head airbags are installed in the door linings.

Operation, Safety 41
10_GT3_21.book Seite 42 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving. force, the side airbag on the impact side is Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat triggered. diagnostic module. This module will record the
area. Do not lean against the inside of the door use of the seat belt restraint system by the driver
The inflation process generates the amount of gas
or outside the window while the vehicle is and passenger when the airbags and/or belt tensi-
required to fill the airbags at the necessary
moving. oner work.
pressure in fractions of a second.
f Using accessories not approved by Porsche
Airbags help to protect the head and upper body, Advanced Airbag
can cause the weight sensing system to be
while simultaneously damping the motion of the
impaired.
driver and passenger in the impact direction in the Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing
f Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire extin- event of a frontal impact or side impact. system for the passenger's seat in accordance
guisher, or first aid kit under the seat. with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
In order to help provide protection in severe colli-
f Only have seats removed and installed by an sions which can cause death and serious injury, 208.
authorized Porsche dealer so that weight airbags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such high Depending on the weight acting on the
sensing components will not be damaged. speed inflation has a negative but unavoidable passenger's seat, the passenger's airbag will
side effect, which is that it can and does cause automatically be switched on and off.
f Give your passenger all of the information in
injuries, including facial and arm abrasions, Depending on the angle and force of impact, the
this chapter.
bruising and broken bones. You can help minimize passenger's airbag which is activated will be
such injuries by always wearing your safety belts. triggered during a collision.
Note
There are many types of accidents in which Precondition for switching the passenger's airbag
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door airbags are not expected to deploy. These include on and off, depending on weight:
lining, seats) may be disassembled only by an accidents where the airbags whould provide no
authorized Porsche dealer. benefit, such as a rear impact against your – Vehicles equipped with key-operated airbag
vehicle. Other accidents where the airbags are deactivation device:
When disposing of a used airbag unit, our safety Switch position AUTO.
instructions must be followed. These instructions designed not to deploy are those where the risk of
can be obtained at any authorized Porsche dealer. injury from the airbag deployment could exeed any – Ignition key is inserted.
protective benefits, such as in low speed
accidents or higher speed accidents where the Improper handling of the weight sensing
Function of the airbag system vehicle decelerates over a longer time. Since system can unintentionally impair switching
airbag deployment does not occur in all accidents, the passenger’s airbag off and on.
Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your
this further emphasizes the need for you and your
primary protection comes from your safety belts.
passenger to always wear safety belts.
The front airbags are triggered during a frontal
collision of sufficient force and direction.
In the event of a side impact of corresponding

42 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 43 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Seat adjustment for the passenger's seat f Do not transport a load and objects behind and Automatic deactivation of the front
under the passenger's seat. passenger’s airbags
Danger! If the load or objects are under the seat, it can
cause malfunctions. Danger!
Safety belts only offer protection when the
backrest is upright and the belts are properly If the weight on the passenger's seat is reduced The use of a child restraint system in the
positioned on the body. Improperly positi- significantly, e.g., by supporting weight on the passenger’s seat can result in serious
oned safety belts can cause serious personal armrest, the passenger's airbag can be switched personal injury or death to the child from an
injury or death in an accident. off. airbag deployment.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or f Select an upright seat position, and do not f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
passenger backrests excessively reclined. support weight on the armrests or lean out of OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
the window. on Page 44.
f Porsche recommends the use of L.A.T.C.H. Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
(Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children) Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat f Before transporting a child on the passenger’s
equipped Porsche child seat. area. Do not lean against the inside of the door seat:
Do not install a child restraint system in or outside the window while the vehicle is Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
the Sports bucket seat. moving. SYSTEMS” on Page 47.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
If the passenger's seat is warped significantly, a f Do not install a child restraint system in
equipped with the LATCH system.
message is displayed on the on-board computer: the Sports bucket seat.
If the seat is in an extreme position (e.g., the f Correct the seat adjustment. – When an up to one-year old child is seated
backrest is in contact with the engine compart-
ment wall), the backrest can warp. Warping of the f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE in the child restraint system, the front airbag is
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD automatically deactivated on the passenger’s
backrest can lead to malfunctions.
COMPUTER” on Page 148. side.
f Correct the seat adjustment.
– When an adult is seated in the front seat, the
Ensure that the seat is not jammed and is self- Vehicle modifications to accommodate front airbag remains active on the passenger‘s
supporting. persons with disabilities side.
Ensure that the backrest is in the upright
position. Because modifications to your vehicle could
compromise your advanced airbag system,
please call 1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your
vehicle modified.

Operation, Safety 43
10_GT3_21.book Seite 44 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f Please see the chapter “KEY-OPERATED Danger!


AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on Page 46.
Risk of serious personal injury or death due
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT to the passenger airbag triggering unintenti-
SYSTEMS” on Page 47. onally.
f Please see the chapter “LATCH SYSTEM When the ignition key is inserted and an up
CHILD SEAT BRACKET ON THE PASSENGER’S to one-year old child is seated in the child
SEAT” on Page 51. restraint system on the passenger’s seat, the
indicator lamp “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”
Note must be on.
f After inserting the ignition key, the If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning light lights lamp does not light up, it could indicate a
up for a few seconds as a bulb check. fault in the system.
In this case:
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up f On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva-
tion device: Switch to position OFF.
– The passenger's airbag is switched off.
f On vehicles without key-operated airbag
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp deactivation device: Do not drive.
does not light up
Note on operation f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
– The passenger's airbag is active and ready for rized Porsche dealer.
Although not desired, it can occur in the case of
operation.
heavier children that the passenger airbag remain
active or, in the case of very light adults or young – If the passenger's seat is not occupied, the
persons, that the passenger airbag is PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will
deactivated. also not light up, even though the passenger's
airbag is switched off.
The condition of the passenger airbag is shown by
the indicator lamp.
If in doubt:
f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on Page 44.

44 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 45 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Note Airbag maintenance


The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
In order to ensure long-term functioning, the
airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
airbag system must be inspected by an authorized
bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
Porsche dealer at the intervals recommended in
be retrofitted.
your Maintenance Booklet.
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Important information
Warning light and warning If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
message the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
Faults are indicated by a warning light in the instru- them to the chapter, “Airbag Systems“, in the
ment panel and a message on the on-board Owner's Manual (safety and disposal rules).
computer. Further information on the airbag system can be
f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE found on stickers attached to the sun visors.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD For special recommendations on the use of child
COMPUTER” on Page 148. restraints:
f In the following cases you should immedi- f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
ately consult an authorized Porsche SYSTEMS” on Page 47.
dealer in order to assure the airbag
system is functioning properly:
– If the warning light does not light up when the
ignition key is inserted or
– If the warning light does not go out once the
engine is running or
– If the warning light appears while driving.

Operation, Safety 45
10_GT3_21.book Seite 46 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”


If the airbag on the passenger’s side is switched
off:
– Warning light “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” is
continuously lit when the ignition key is
inserted.

Danger!
Risk of serious personal injury or death from
the passenger’s airbag.
If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” warning
light is not lit when the ignition key is inserted
and the Airbag OFF switch is switched to the
OFF-Position, this could indicate a fault in the
system.
f Do not install a child restraint system on the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
Key-operated airbag deactivation device passenger’s seat.

In case your vehicle is equipped with LATCH, you Danger! f Have the fault remedied immediately.
can switch off (OFF) the passenger's airbag Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Risk of serious personal injury or death for
manually. In the automatic mode (AUTO), the passenger if passenger’s airbag remains
airbag will be switched on or off automatically switched off after the child restraint system Note
depending on the weight on the passenger seat. is removed. f Do not install a child restraint system in
f Switch off the passenger’s airbag on the key f Make sure that the key switch is switched to the Sports bucket seat.
switch using the vehicle key. AUTO once the child seat has been removed, The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
Switch position AUTO – passenger’s airbag is in order to provide protection to the adult airbag in combination with the LATCH attachment
active occupants. bracket are not installed at the factory. They can
be retrofitted (not on vehicles with Sports bucket
Switch position OFF – passenger’s airbag is
seat).
switched off
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.

46 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 47 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Child Restraint Systems instruction label on the restraint and in the instruc- Danger!
tion manual provided with the restraint.
Risk of serious personal injury or death to the
f Do not install a child restraint system in
child.
the Sports bucket seat. Danger!
The Sports bucket seat cannot be f Follow all child restraint instructions and
equipped with the LATCH system. The use of a child restraint system in the warnings in this manual.
passenger’s seat can result in serious
Porsche recommends that all infants and children personal injury or death to the child from an – When using an infant or child restraint system,
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times airbag deployment. be sure to follow all manufacturer's instruc-
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with To reduce risk of injury from an inflating tions on installation and use.
applicable laws. airbag in an accident, Porsche strongly
recommends: – Infants and small children should never be held
Use only child restraint systems with the LATCH-
on the lap, nor should they share a safety belt
system recommended by Porsche. These sys- f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG with another occupant while the vehicle is in
tems have been tested and adjusted to the interior OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” motion.
of your Porsche and the appropriate child weight on Page 44.
groups. Other systems have not been tested and – Children too big for child restraint systems
could entail an increased risk of injury or death. f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT must use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt
SYSTEMS” on Page 47. can be used providing it does not cross the
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compa-
tible at your authorized Porsche dealer. f Do not install a child restraint system in face or the neck of the child.
the Sports bucket seat. – Choose a child restraint system according to
f Always observe the separate installation The Sports bucket seat cannot be the weight of the child.
instructions for your child seat. equipped with the LATCH system.
– Child restraint systems that are damaged or
The use of infant or child restraints is required by
have been heavily stressed in an accident must
law in all 50 states of the U.S. and all Canadian Note
be replaced immediately.
provinces. The child restraint system should be
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
one that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle – Children could be endangered in a crash if their
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
Safety Standards and should be secured by a lap child restraints are not properly secured in the
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted (not
belt or lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt or for vehicle.
on vehicles with Sports bucket seat).
child seats equipped with the LATCH sytem
– Do not affix things to child restraint systems or
(Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children, also f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
cover it with other materials.
known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH anchorages.
A statement by the seat manufacturer of compli-
ance with this standard can be found on the

Operation, Safety 47
10_GT3_21.book Seite 48 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

– Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to Direction of installation for child restraint Note
advise you about the installation possibility for systems If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use on
a Porsche child restraint system which allows
the front seat, the anchor point must be used for
a key-operated airbag deactivation of the Group 0 and 0+: Children up to 29 lbs
anchoring the top tether.
passenger’s airbag. (13 kg)
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
– The key-operated airbag deactivation device Children of this weight must be transported in a
ANCHORAGES” on Page 52.
installation requires special programming restraint system which is installed facing rear-
available only from your authorized Porsche ward.
dealer.
Group I: Children in between 20 lbs (9 kg)
f Please see the chapter “KEY-OPERATED and 40 lbs (18 kg)
AIRBAG DEACTIVATION DEVICE” on Page 46.
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.

Group II: Children in between 33 lbs (15 kg)


and 55 lbs (25 kg)
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.

Group III: Children in between 49 lbs (22 kg)


and 80 lbs (36 kg)
Children of this weight are held in child restraint
systems facing forward.
f The vehicle seat must be adjusted so that it is
in its lower rear position.

48 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 49 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Using child restraint systems in the Child restraint system for up to one-year old Child restraint system for children older than
passenger seat children one year
– Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF Your vehicle is equipped with a weight sensing
f Do not install a child restraint system in
indicator lamp lights up. system for the passenger's seat in accordance
the Sports bucket seat.
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
– Adjust the passenger's seat as far away from
208. Depending on the weight acting on the
Danger! the airbag as possible.
passenger's seat, the passenger's airbag will
The use of a child restraint system in the automatically be switched on or off.
Danger!
passenger seat can result in serious
personal injury or death to the child from an Risk of serious personal injury or death due Small adult passengers
airbag deployment. to the passenger’s airbag triggering uninten- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating tionally. indicator lamp does not light up.
airbag in an accident, Porsche strongly
When the ignition is on and an up to one-year
recommends: Danger!
old child is seated in the child restraint
f Please see the chapter “PASSENGER AIRBAG system on the passenger’s seat the indicator Risk of serious personal injury or death due
OFF INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” lamp „PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF“ must be on. to the passenger’s airbag not triggering.
on Page 44.
If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator When the ignition key is inserted and the
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT lamp does not light up, it could indicate a small adult passenger is seated on the
SYSTEMS” on Page 47. fault in the system. passenger’s seat, the indicator lamp
In this case:
f Do not install a child restraint system in “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” must be off.
the Sports bucket seat. f On vehicles with key-operated airbag deactiva- If the “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF” indicator
The Sports bucket seat cannot be tion device: Switch to position OFF. lamp lights up, it could indicate a fault in the
equipped with the LATCH system.
f On vehicles without key-operated airbag system.
deactivation device: Do not use a child In this case:
restraint system in the passenger’s seat. f Do not carry a passenger in the passenger’s
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho- seat.
rized Porsche dealer. f Have the fault remedied at the nearest autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

Operation, Safety 49
10_GT3_21.book Seite 50 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Automatic locking retractor Danger! Activating the automatic locking retractor


Risk of serious personal injury or death to the 1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to
f Do not install a child restraint system in
child, when excessive force is acting on the the passenger's seat, adjust the passenger's
the Sports bucket seat.
passenger's seat due to the seat belt. seat as far away from the airbag as possible.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
In such cases, the passenger's airbag can be
equipped with the LATCH system. 2. Fasten child seat.
switched on unintentionally.
The safety belt for the passenger is equipped with 3. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
f After fastening the child restraint system, do
an automatic locking retractor for securing the this point the locking mechanism is activated.
not adjust the seat.
child restraint system. When activated, this
4. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
retractor allows you to securely fasten the child f Check the condition of the passenger’s airbag
and make certain that it is properly latched.
restraint system in place so that inadvertent shown by the indicator lamp in the central
Make no more adjustments to the seat.
movements will not occur. console.
5. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on
Before transporting a child on the passenger’s
the child restraint system. You may further
seat:
tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT it to retract.
SYSTEMS” on Page 47. Make sure that excessive seat belt forces do
not occur by moving the seat with the child
seat installed.

Releasing the safety belt


1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch.
2. Then make certain that the belt has fully
retracted. At this point the automatic locking
feature will be disengaged.
Seek appropriate advice from your authorized
Porsche dealer about the possible installation
of a Porsche child restraint system.

50 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 51 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

LATCH System You can obtain child seats that are LATCH compa-
tible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
Child seat bracket on the passenger’s
seat f Always observe the separate installation
instructions for your child seat.
f Do not install a child restraint system in
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
the Sports bucket seat.
SYSTEMS” on Page 47.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
The key switch for switching off the passenger’s
airbag and the LATCH attachment bracket are not
installed at the factory. They can be retrofitted (not
on vehicles with Sports bucket seats).
f Please see your authorized Porsche dealer.
Porsche recommends the use of a Porsche Child
Seat with Lower Anchorage and Tether for
Children system (LATCH).
These systems have been tested and adjusted to
the interior of your Porsche and the appropriate
Installing a LATCH child seat system
child weight groups. Other systems have not been 1. Secure the child seat to retaining lugs A as
tested and could entail an increased risk of injury. outlined in the instruction manual for the child
seat.
2. Pull the child seat to check that both fastening
points are engaged correctly.

Note
Make sure that the key switch is switched to AUTO
once the child seat has been removed, in order to
provide protection to the adult occupants.

Operation, Safety 51
10_GT3_21.book Seite 52 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Child Restraint Anchorages


f Please see the chapter “AUTOMATIC LOCKING
RETRACTOR” on Page 50.
f Do not install a child restraint system in
the Sports bucket seat.
The Sports bucket seat cannot be
equipped with the LATCH system.
If your child restraint seat requires the use of a
tether strap, you will want to use the anchor point
behind the passenger’s seat under the carpet.
To ensure proper installation, see your authorized
Porsche dealer.

Note
If a child seat with top tether is adapted for use on
the passenger’s seat, the anchor point must be
used for anchoring the top tether. Warning!
The child restraint anchorage is designed to
withstand only the load imposed by a
correctly fitted child restraint. Under no
circumstances is the anchorage to be used
for adult safety belt or harness. Such use
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
f Do not misuse the child restraint anchorage.
This is not designed to withstand a load
imposed by an adult.

52 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 53 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Clutch Pedal Setting the parking brake


The clutch pedal must be depressed fully f Pull the lever all the way up (arrow).
before the starter will engage. With the ignition on, the parking brake warning
lights in the instrument panel and on-board
Warning! computer will come on if the lever is even
slightly raised. A firm pull upward is required to
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious properly engage the parking brake.
personal injury or death. If the brake is not fully set, the vehicle may roll
f Always check the movement of the clutch without control.
pedal before driving and make sure that it is f Move the gearshift lever to reverse or first
not obstructed by a floor mat or any other gear.
object.
f Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding parking brake is fully set and the vehicle is not
into positions that could interfere with the safe moving at all.
operation of your vehicle.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you Danger!
nonskid floor mats of the correct size. Parking Brake Risk of serious personal injury or death. A
To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis- partially engaged parking brake may allow
Parking brake force is mechanically transferred to
sion: the vehicle to roll, causing serious personal
the rear wheels by means of cables.
f Always depress the clutch pedal fully when injury or death to any person in its path.
f Use the parking brake only after the vehicle
changing gears.
has come to a full stop. f Engage the parking brake fully.
f Do not hold the car on a steep grade with the
clutch pedal partially depressed.
Releasing the parking brake
Should the free travel of the clutch pedal suddenly
f Pull the lever slightly up as you depress the
become larger, it could mean a malfunction of the
release button, and then push the lever all the
clutch.
way down.
f See your Porsche dealer for correction.

Operation, Safety 53
10_GT3_21.book Seite 54 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Parking brake warning light USA Brakes Brake system function


f Make it a habit to check the operation of your Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted
Parking brake warning light brakes before driving. hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disc
Canada Keep in mind that the braking distance increases
brakes at the front and rear.
Both circuits function independently. One brake
The warning lights in the instrument panel and on- very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph or
circuit operates the front and the other operates
board computer will go out after the parking brake 100 km/h, for example, it is not twice but four
the rear.
is fully released. times longer than 30 mph or 50 km/h. Tire
The warning lights are not an indicator that the traction is also less effective when the roads are If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still
parking brake is fully set; it is only intended to be wet or slippery. operate. However, you will notice an increased
pedal travel when you apply the brakes.
a warning to release the parking brake before f Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
driving the car. Failure of one brake circuit will cause the stopping
from the car in front of you.
distance to increase.
Caution! Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic Compo-
site Brake (PCCB) Warning!
A partially engaged brake will overheat the
rear brakes, reduce their effectiveness and Even though the brake discs consist of alloyed Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
cause excessive wear. grey cast iron, they will unavoidably start to personal injury or death.
corrode if your car is parked for an extended In the unlikely event of hydraulic failure of
f Release the parking brake fully. one brake circuit:
period. The brakes will tend to “rub” as a result.
f When parking your car, always set the parking
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion f Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in
depend on the amount of time the vehicle was that position.
brake by pulling all the way up on the lever.
parked, whether granular or liquid road salt was A mechanical linkage activates the second
f Move the gearshift lever to reverse or first spread and whether grease-dissolving agents circuit, and you will be able to bring the vehicle
gear. were used in car washes. to a stop.
If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
f On hills also turn the front wheels towards the f After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop,
recommend having the brake system checked by
curb. avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it
experts at an authorized Porsche dealer.
towed to the nearest authorized Porsche
dealer for repair.

54 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 55 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Brake system warning light Brake pedal Warning!


You can check the functionality of the brake To avoid overheating and premature wear of
system warning light by switching the ignition to Warning! the brakes:
the “On” position and verifying that the warning Risk of an accident, resulting in serious f Before descending a steep grade, reduce
light illuminates. personal injury or death. speed and shift the transmission into a lower
Any obstruction of the brake pedal could gear to control speed.
Brake warning light USA increase the stopping distance.
f Do not “ride the brakes” by resting your foot on
f Always check the movement of the brake pedal the pedal when not intending to apply brake
Brake warning light Canada before driving and make sure that it is not pressure.
obstructed by a floor mat or any other object.
f Do not hold the pedal down too long or too
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on-
board computer go on while driving, the brake often.
into positions that could interfere with the safe This could cause the brakes to get hot and not
fluid level may be too low, or (if the brake pedal
operation of your vehicle. function properly.
travel has increased) one of the two brake circuits
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you
may have failed.
nonskid floor mats of the correct size.
A greater braking pressure will be required,
stopping distances will be longer and the braking Note
behavior will change, particularly in curves.
In case one of the two brake circuits fails, incre-
With correctly adjusted brakes, and a correctly ased pedal travel is required to bring your vehicle
working brake system, the pedal travel to the to a full stop.
point of brake actuation should be 1-3/16 in. to
1-9/16 in. or 30 to 40 mm.
Whenever the brake pedal travel exceeds this
distance, have the brake system checked.

Operation, Safety 55
10_GT3_21.book Seite 56 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Brake booster Brake wear Brake pads


The brake booster assists braking only when Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still Wear on the brake pads and brake discs depends
the engine is running. subject to wear. The rate at which they wear to a great extent on the driving style and the condi-
depends on how the brakes are used. tions of use and therefore cannot be expressed in
When the car is moving while the engine is not
actual miles on the road.
running, or if the brake booster is defective, more f Have the brake system inspected at the
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring intervals recommended in your Maintenance The high-performance brake system is designed
the car to a stop. Booklet. for optimal braking effect at all speeds and tempe-
If this happens, ABS and PSM will also not ratures.
operate. Brake system warning light Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
You can check the functionality of the brake conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
Moisture or road salt on brakes affects braking.
system warning light by switching the ignition to therefore might cause “brake noises”. This also
Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake applica- the “On” position and verifying that the warning applies after completion of the breaking-in period
tions. light illuminates. required for the new brake components.

Warning! Warning light USA New brake pads or linings

Risk of an accident, resulting in serious New brake pads and brake discs have to be
personal injury or death. “broken in”, and therefore only attain optimal
Driving through water may reduce the
Warning light Canada friction when the car has covered several hundred
traction. miles or km.
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on- The slightly reduced braking ability must be
Moisture on brakes from road water, car
board computer stay on when the engine is compensated for by pressing the brake pedal
wash, or coating of road salt may affect
running or come on while driving, the brake pads harder. This also applies whenever the brake pads
braking efficiency.
are worn excessively. and brake discs are replaced.
f Cautiously apply brakes to test brakes after
f Do not continue to operate the vehicle.
exposure to road water, etc.
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
or replace the brake pads.

56 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 57 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

ABS Brake System Warning! Operation of the ABS system


(Antilock Brake System) The increased control that is provided should
A wheel speed sensor is mounted to each of the
not induce you to take greater risks with your
The ABS system represents a major contribution four wheels. If wheel lock-up of either of the front
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of
to the enhancement of active safety in your wheels or the rear wheels is sensed during
physics cannot be overcome, even with ABS.
vehicle. This system prevents the wheels from braking, the brake pressure is adjusted automati-
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate
locking in a panic stop on almost all road cally until the wheel no longer slips.
speed cannot be reduced, even by the ABS.
surfaces. The driver bears the responsibility for all If braking forces approach the wheel lock-up point
driving maneuvers. for all wheels (panic braking) the ABS system will
With the ABS system in your vehicle, the f Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road
intervene to provide a rapid rythmic braking. The
following areas are enhanced: and weather conditions.
proper operation of ABS is perceived by the driver
as a pulsating brake pedal in conjunction with
Steering, vehicle remains steerable under all f Obey all traffic laws. audible noise and perhaps some vibration.
braking forces when ABS is engaged.
Other vehicles not equipped with the ABS f If you experience these sensations while
Good directional control, no swerving caused system may not be able to maintain control, driving or a road surface with questionable
by locking of wheels under braking conditions. especially on wet or poor road surfaces and traction, reduce vehicle speed appropriate for
thus may be more likely to impact you from the prevailing road conditions.
Shorter stopping distance, stopping distances
behind.
are usually reduced because controlled braking is f If full braking should be necessary, press the
maximized. f To minimize that risk, use your ABS system to brake pedal all the way down throughout the
increase your ability to maneuver to avoid entire braking procedure, regardless of the
Prevention of wheel lock up, no brake-induced
dangerous situations and not merely to try to pulsating pedal. Do not ease up on pressure
sliding and thus no localized tire wear from
stop in the shortest distance possible. applied to the pedal.
emergency braking.
The functional readiness of all the main electrical
The crucial advantage of the ABS system over a
components of the ABS is checked by an
conventional brake system is in the area of
electronic monitoring system both before and
maintaining directional control and maneuverabi-
while you drive.
lity of the car in emergency situations.

Operation, Safety 57
10_GT3_21.book Seite 58 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning!
Warning light USA
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
Warning light Canada The control unit of the ABS brake system is
set for standard tire size. If non-standard
When the ignition is switched on the ABS warning tires are installed, the control unit may misin-
light will light up while the system is electronically terpret the speed of the vehicle, because of
interrogated and goes out when the engine is the variant data it receives from the sensors
started if the check is not yet complete. on the axles.
If the ABS warning lamp fails to go out, this
indicates that ABS has been deactivated due to a f Use only tire makes and types tested by
fault. If the warning lights in the instrument panel Porsche.
and on-board computer light up while you are
driving, this indicates that a fault has occurred. In
both cases, normal braking, as in vehicles without
ABS, is still retained.
The ABS system should, however, be examined at
an authorized Porsche dealer immediately to
prevent the occurrence of further faults.
f If the ABS system becomes inoperative, take
your vehicle to your authorized Porsche dealer
immediately.

58 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 59 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Porsche Stability Management PSM uses these values to determine the direction Advantages of PSM
of travel indicated by the driver.
(PSM) PSM intervenes and helps to correct the course if – Improved traction and lane-holding ability in all
PSM is an active control system for stabilization of the actual direction of motion deviates from the driving situations – even on road surfaces with
the vehicle during extreme driving maneuvers. chosen course (steering-wheel position): varying friction.
It brakes individual wheels as needed. In addition,
– The system compensates for undesired lateral
Warning! the engine power may be manipulated in order to
vehicle reactions when the driver releases the
stabilize the vehicle.
accelerator pedal or brakes when cornering.
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
The events below inform the driver of PSM control This compensation functions up to the
personal injury or death.
operations and warn him/her to adapt his/her maximum lateral acceleration.
The increased control that is provided should
not induce you to take greater risks with your driving style to the road conditions:
– PSM actively helps stabilize the vehicle as
safety. The limits dictated by the laws of – The multifunctional information light on the required during dynamic driving maneuvers
physics cannot be overcome, even with PSM. instrument panel flashes. (e.g. rapid steering movements, during lane
The risk of accidents due to inappropriate changes or on alternating bends).
speed cannot be reduced, even by PSM. – Hydraulic noises can be heard.
– Improved braking stability in curves and on
The driver bears the responsibility for all – The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel
different or varying road surfaces.
driving maneuvers. forces are altered as PSM controls the brakes.
f Adapt your driving style to the prevailing road – Reduced engine power.
and weather conditions.
– The brake pedal pulsates and its position is
f Obey all traffic laws. changed during braking.
In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration,
Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system foot pressure must be increased after the
and engine continuously measure: brake pedal has begun vibrating.
– Speed
– Direction of travel (steering angle)
– Lateral acceleration
– Rate of turn about the vertical axis
– Longitudinal acceleration

Operation, Safety 59
10_GT3_21.book Seite 60 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Readiness for operation Switching off Stability Control (SC)


PSM is switched on automatically every time you
Precondition:
start the engine.
The light-emitting diode in the SC+TC OFF button
PSM should always be switched on during must be off.
“normal” driving.
f Press SC OFF button.
However, it may make sense to switch off PSM Stability Control is switched off after a short
temporarily in exceptional situations, for example: delay.
The light-emitting diode in the button is lit up.
– On a loose surface or in deep snow,
When the system is switched off, the multi-
– when “rocking the vehicle free” and functional PSM light on the instrument panel
is lit and the message “SC OFF” appears
– when using snow chains.
continuously on the on-board computer.
An acoustic signal also sounds.
Switching off PSM
– When Stability Control is switched off, sportier
PSM can be switched off in 2 stages: Traction Control is activated.
– Stage 1 SC OFF: – Brake control is deactivated.
Danger!
Switch off Stability Control (SC). – The ABS remains active.
There is a risk of accident due to loss of
– Stage 2 SC+TC OFF:
control of the vehicle. There is no stabilizing
Also switch off Traction Control (TC). Switching Stability Control (SC) back on
brake control in either switch-off stages
(even when the brakes are used).
f Press SC OFF button.
f PSM should always be switched on during Stability Control is switched on after a short
“normal” driving. This particularly applies in delay.
wet conditions. The light-emitting diode in the button and the
multi-functional PSM light on the instrument
panel go out.
The on-board computer shows a message.

60 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 61 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

– All PSM functions are deactivated. f Have the fault repaired at your authorized
Porsche dealer immediately.
– The ABS remains active.
f Please see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
Note INTO OPERATION” on Page 218.
If the PSM is deactivated directly using the
SC+TC OFF button, the light-emitting diode of the Towing
SC OFF button also lights up.
f Please see the chapter “TOWING” on
Page 235.
Switching Stability Control (SC) and
Traction Control (TC) back on
Checks on test stands
f Press SC+TC OFF button.
PSM is switched on after a short delay. Brake tests must be performed only on plate-
The light-emitting diode in the button and the type test stands or roller test stands.
multi-functional PSM light on the instrument
panel go out. The ignition must be off.
The on-board computer shows a message. The following limit values must not be exceeded
Switching off Stability Control (SC) and on roller test stands:
Traction Control (TC) Multifunctional PSM light
– Testing speed 5 mph (8 km/h)
f Press SC+TC OFF button. – The multifunctional light on the instrument – Test duration 20 seconds
Stability Control and Traction Control switch off panel lights up for a lamp check when the
completely after a short delay. ignition is switched on. Handbrake tests on the brake test stand must
The light-emitting diode in the button is lit up. only be carried out with the ignition switched
– The light flashes to indicate PSM control off.
When the system is switched off, the multifunc-
operations.
tional PSM light on the instrument panel is lit
Power measurement
and the message “SC+TC OFF” appears conti- – In conjunction with a message on the on-board
nuously on the on-board computer. computer, the light indicates that PSM is fully Power measurements on roller test stands are not
A gong signal also sounds. or partially deactivated. approved by Porsche.
An acoustic signal also sounds.
f Push the on-board computer lever forward to
acknowledge the additional message under – The light indicates a fault in conjunction with a
the digital speedometer. message on the on-board computer.
PSM is out of order.

Operation, Safety 61
10_GT3_21.book Seite 62 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Sport mode
When the Sport mode is switched on, the exhaust
gas back pressure in the lower and middle ranges
is reduced in the variable exhaust system. This
serves to produce a marked increase in torque in
the engine speed range from approx. 3000 rpm
and 4000 rpm. The best values for vehicle accele-
ration and low-end torque are achieved when
Sport mode is switched on.

Switching Sport mode on and off


f Press button in the centre console.
When Sport mode is switched on, the light-
emitting diode in the button is lit.

Note on operation
After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
automatically reset to Normal mode.

62 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 63 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Porsche Active Suspension Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM)


Management (PASM) The dynamic engine mounting with variable
The previously selected PASM mode is always damping is a system for improving driving
activated after the engine is started. dynamics and enhancing driving comfort.
There is no automatic return to Normal mode after Depending on the driving situation, the ideal
the ignition is switched off. mounting stiffness and damping is automatically
selected in a range between an almost rigid
PASM makes two running-gear setups available to connection of the engine to the body (improved
the driver: “Normal” and “Sport”. driving dynamics) and a decoupling of the engine
The selection is made via a button on the center from the body (improved driving comfort).
console.
When in Normal mode the running gear is in a Warning message
basic setup for roads and circuits with “irregular”
surfaces. Dynamic engine mounting faults are indicated by
Sport mode provides a shock-absorber setting a warning message on the on-board computer.
for particularly high driving dynamics (e.g. on level f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
circuits). INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
Switching on PASM Sport mode
The variable suspension system selects the appro- COMPUTER” on Page 148.
priate damping level for each wheel according to f Press PASM button in the center console.
the situation and conditions of driving. When PASM Sport mode is switched on, the
light-emitting diode in the button is lit up and a
Example:
message is shown on the on-board computer.
If the vehicle is driven in a very sporty manner in
Normal mode, PASM automatically adapts the
shock-absorber behavior to the driving situation Switching off PASM Sport mode
accordingly.
f Press PASM button in the center console.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out
and the on-board computer displays a
message.

Operation, Safety 63
10_GT3_21.book Seite 64 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Front Axle Lift System


The front axle lift system enables the body to be
electropneumatically raised at the front by about
1.18 in. (30 mm) (front edge of front spoiler).
This in turn enables damage to the body to be
prevented, which e. g. may occur when driving
into multi-level parking garages with steep ramps
or over speed bumps.

Readiness for operation


The front axle lift system is operational when the
engine is running and the vehicle is at a standstill
or up to a speed of approx. 30 mph (50 km/h).
The vehicle is automatically lowered to the basic
level again when a speed of approx. 30 mph
(50 km/h) is exceeded. The logo “LIFT” also appears next to the digital
Raising front axle
speedometer when the front axle is fully raised.
f Press button in the center console.
The vehicle is raised at the front axle within Caution!
approx. 3 seconds.
Risk of damage through uncontrolled
When the lift function is activated, the light-
lowering of the front axle at engine standstill.
emitting diode in the button is lit.
In this particular system, the retaining
position cannot be maintained in the upper
position over an extended period without
active replenishing of the pressure accumu-
lator or engine operation.
f Always park the vehicle in the lowered position.

64 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 65 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Lowering front axle – During extended vehicle immobilization, the Warning message
pressure accumulator may be completely
f Press button in the center console. emptied. In this case, the first time the axle is Front axle lift system faults are indicated by
The vehicle is lowered to the basic level. raised, a period of up to 2 minutes may elapse a warning message on the on-board computer.
The light-emitting diode in the button and in the before the vehicle height is reached and “LIFT” f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
tachometer goes out. is displayed. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 148.
Caution! – A flashing LED in the button indicates that the
system is currently not available. Possible
Risk of damage through bottoming out the
causes may be:
vehicle.
f Do not lower the vehicle when it is positioned > Automatic overload protection is active.
above an obstacle. The system will be available again
following a brief cooling-down phase.
The cooling-down phase may be
Notes on operation
extended when outside temperatures
– When raised, the damping properties of the are very high.
front axle change and noise may be heard in
the area of the front axle coil springs during > The speed threshold of 30 mph
steering movements. (50 km/h) has been exceeded. The
system will be available again once the
– The doors must be closed when lowering the speed falls below the threshold.
front axle.
> If automatic lowering is actuated by
– The blowing-off procedure may result in exceeding a speed of approx. 30 mph
system-related hissing noise. This does not (50 km/h) in combination with hard
represent a malfunction in the lift system. acceleration, the required lowering
duration may mean that “LIFT not
lowered” is displayed. The display goes
out again as soon as the front axle has
been completely lowered.

Operation, Safety 65
10_GT3_21.book Seite 66 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

For vehicles with automatic anti-dazzle Orientation light


mirrors
A light-emitting diode at the bottom of the interior
f Switch off the automatic anti-dazzle operation
mirror improves orientation in the passenger
of the mirrors before you switch on the interior
compartment when it is dark.
light.
Otherwise the mirrors may accidentally swivel Note on operation
into the anti-dazzle position.
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus,
the brightness of the orientation light can be
Interior lights, reading lights changed in PCM.
Switching off f Please see the chapter “Individual Memory” in
f Press left half of switch. the separate PCM Owner’s Manual.

Switching to continuous illumination


f Press right half of switch.

Switching on and off automatically


A, C - Switch for reading light on driver/passenger side
B - Switch for interior light and footwell lights f Move switch to center position.
D - Orientation light
The interior and footwell lights are switched
Interior Lights on when a door is unlocked or opened or when
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF lock.
AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 208.
The lights are switched off with a delay of
approx. 2 minutes after the doors are closed.
The light goes out immediately as soon as the
ignition is switched on or the vehicle is locked.

66 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 67 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

The ignition lock has a total of four ignition lock Switch position 1
positions.
The ignition key rebounds to the initial position Ignition on
from every ignition lock position. f Turn ignition key to position 1.
f For your safety, fasten safety belts. Ignition is switched on.
f Please see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on Note on operation
Page 18.
All electrical equipment can be switched on.
f Please see the chapter “KEY WITH RADIO
REMOTE CONTROL” on Page 19. f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 148.
Before starting the engine
f Apply the footbrake.
f Move the gearshift lever into neutral.
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully
before the starter will engage.
O - Initial position
1 - Ignition on
2 - Start engine Switch position 0
3 - Ignition off
Initial position
Ignition/Starter Switch with The ignition key cannot be withdrawn when the
anti-theft Steering Lock ignition is switched on or when the engine has
been started.
Caution! To withdraw the ignition key:
Risk of damage. If extra weight has been f Stop the vehicle.
added to the inserted ignition key such as,
e. g. a heavy bunch of keys and/or a key f Switch ignition off.
fob, the ignition lock may be damaged. f Remove ignition key.
f Do not attach any extra weight to the inserted
ignition key.

Operation, Safety 67
10_GT3_21.book Seite 68 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Switch position 2 Locking the steering column Automatic unlocking


The steering column is unlocked when the vehicle
Start engine Automatic locking
is unlocked with the radio remote control.
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2. The steering column is automatically locked when
the ignition key is withdrawn from the ignition lock. Note
f Please see the chapter “STARTING PROCE-
DURES” on Page 70. f To avoid discharging the battery, always
Warning! remove the ignition key from the ignition lock.
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
Switch position 3
personal injury or death. Page 211.
Ignition off The steering wheel will lock and will cause
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 3.
loss of steering. Gong
f Never remove key from the ignition lock or turn If you leave the key in the ignition/steering lock, a
Note on operation the key off while the vehicle is moving. gong will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is f Always withdraw the ignition key when This is a reminder to remove the key.
left inserted. leaving the vehicle.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
pulled out of the ignition lock if the emergency
operation is performed:
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERA-
TION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on
Page 69.

68 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 69 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Emergency operation – pulling out the 3. Use metal hook A to remove the plastic lid B 4. Turn ignition key counter-clockwise as far as it
ignition key from the ignition lock. Make sure that plastic lid will go.
B is not lost.
5. Press metal hook A into opening C.
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can be pulled
An unlocking sound will be heard.
out only if the emergency operation is performed.
6. Turn the ignition key to initial position (0) and
1. Grasp the fuse box cover at the finger hole and
remove.
pull it off.
7. Re-fit the plastic lid B.
2. Unclip metal hook A on the inside of the cover.

Operation, Safety 69
10_GT3_21.book Seite 70 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Starting Procedures Starting the engine Danger!


Engine exhaust fumes have many compon-
f Please see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER” on f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2.
ents which you can smell. They also contain
Page 18.
f As soon as the engine starts, release the carbon monoxide (CO), which is a colorless
f Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL ignition key. and odorless gas.
SYSTEM” on Page 168. Carbon monoxide can cause unconscious-
The first operation of the starter is ended
ness and even death if inhaled.
automatically when the engine starts.
Warning! If the engine does not start, subsequent starter f Never start or let the engine run in an
Serious injury or death may result if you are operations will not be ended automatically. enclosed, unventilated area.
involved in a collision without having It is not recommended to sit in your car for
If the engine fails to start after 10 or 15 seconds
fastened the safety belts. prolonged periods with the engine on and the
of cranking:
car not moving.
f Fasten safety belts before driving away. f Wait about 10 seconds before engaging the
An unattended vehicle with a running engine
starter again.
is potentially hazardous.
Before starting the engine f When starting the engine, be ready to drive If warning lights should come on to indicate
immediately. improper operation, they would go
f Apply the footbrake. Drive vehicle at moderate speeds and avoid unnoticed.
f Move the gearshift lever into neutral. engine speeds above 4,200 rpm during the
f Never leave the engine idling unattended.
The clutch pedal must be depressed fully first 5 minutes.
Risk of fire due to hot exhaust system.
before the starter will engage. f Do not let the engine idle to warm up.
Temperature sensors on the engine automatically f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
provide the correct fuel/air mixture required for where the hot exhaust system may come in
starting. contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
Therefore, it is not necessary to depress the other flammable material.
accelerator pedal while starting a cold or a f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
warm engine. the fire department.
Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
out the fire.

70 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 71 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Stopping Engine Engine-compartment blower, Automatic garage door


radiator fan
f Turn key back to position 3. The ignition system in your Porsche may interfere
The radiator and radiator fan are in the front of the with your electronically operated garage door.
f Do not stop engine immediately after hard or
car.
extended driving. f To check this, drive your Porsche close to the
The engine-compartment blower is mounted on
Keep engine running at increased idle for garage door. Make sure not to interfere with
the engine compartment lid.
about two minutes to prevent excessive heat the operating range of the door.
build-up before turning off engine.
Warning! f Run the engine at different speeds.
f To avoid discharging the battery, always
Risk of injury. f If the garage door opens or closes without you
remove the ignition key from the ignition lock.
After the engine is switched off, the engine- operating the garage door unit in your car,
f When leaving the vehicle always remove the compartment temperature is monitored for contact the dealer who installed the automatic
ignition key, apply the parking brake and approx. 30 minutes. garage door to have the frequency and/or
engage the 1st gear or reverse gear. During this period, and depending on tempe- coding of the garage door signal changed or
modified.
f Engage the steering lock by moving the rature, the engine-compartment blower may
steering wheel to the left or right. continue to run or start to run.
Turn the steering wheel to the locking position f Carry out work in these areas only with the
before you switch off the engine so that you engine off, the ignition off, and exercise
don’t have to exert yourself when locking or extreme caution.
unlocking the steering.
Risk of injury. The radiator fan in the front
end of the car may be operating or unexpec-
Warning!
tedly start operating when the engine is
Danger of injury. Hot engine compartment switched on.
components can burn skin on contact.
f Carry out work in these areas only with the
f Before working on any part in the engine engine switched off.
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
down sufficiently.

Operation, Safety 71
10_GT3_21.book Seite 72 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning!
Risk of an accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
f Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency
repairs, move the car well off the road. Switch
on the emergency flasher and mark the car
with road flares or other warning devices.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone approa-
ching from the rear may not realize your
vehicle is stopped and cause a collision.
Risk of fire due to hot exhaust system.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
where the hot exhaust system may come in
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
other flammable material.

Emergency Flasher Switch Hot engine compartment components can


burn skin on contact.
Operational readiness of the emergency flasher
f Before working on any part in the engine
does not depend on the ignition lock and turn
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
signal lever position.
down sufficiently.
f If your car is disabled or parked under
emergency conditions switch on the
emergency flasher in the dashboard.
All turn signals and the indicator light in the
switch flash with the same frequency.

72 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 73 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Daytime running lights


Low beam, high beam
Only with ignition on, The daytime running lights are integrated in the
daytime running lights switched off front auxiliary headlights. These lights are
switched on only when the engine is running and
Rear fog light with the light switch in the positions OFF or HOME.

Pull switch. Operation of the daytime running lights may vary


Indicator light on. depending on country-specific regulations.
Canada only:
Warning chime In addition to the auxiliary headlights the parking
lights are switched on.
If the ignition key is withdrawn and the door is
opened while the lights (not the parking light or USA only:
Welcome Home lighting) are on, a chime warns of The daytime running lights can be deactivated in
possible battery discharge. the on-board computer.
f Please see the chapter “LIGHT” on Page 146.
In some countries, differences are possible
due to provisions of law.

Light Switch
Lights switched off
Daytime running lights are switched on
when the engine is running.

Welcome Home Function


Daytime running lights are switched on
when the engine is running.

Parking lights, side marker lights,


license plate light, instrument illumination
switched on, daytime running lights
switched off

Operation, Safety 73
10_GT3_21.book Seite 74 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Dynamic Cornering Light Welcome Home Lighting Automatic Headlight Beam


Above a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) the low beam
Adjustment
is swivelled into the direction of the bend for better Switching on
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights feature
illumination of the road.
f Move light switch to the HOME position. dynamic headlight beam adjustment.
If the dynamic cornering light malfunctions, the When the ignition is switched on, the level of the
For improved visibility and security when you get
blue high beam indicator light in the tachometer headlight beam automatically changes in accor-
in and out of the car, the daytime running lights
starts to flash. dance with the vehicle load.
and the tail lights remain on for a certain period of
The level of the headlight beam is automatically
Individual Light Functions time:
kept constant during acceleration and braking.
– When you get out of the car, the lights are
Further individual light functions are available in
turned on for approx. 30 seconds after the
vehicles equipped with the Sport Chrono Package Checking operation
door is opened. The off-delay time resumes
Plus.
when the vehicle is locked.
1. Switch the low beam on.
f Please see the chapter “Individual Memory” in On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package
the separate PCM Owner’s Manual. Plus, the PCM can be used to set the off-delay 2. Insert ignition key and switch ignition on.
time. This setting also changes the lighting The light beam first dips all the way down and
period for unlocking the vehicle. is then adapted to the vehicle load.
Please see the chapter “Individual Memory” in
If this test item is not met, the headlight beam
the separate PCM Owner’s Manual.
adjustment system must be checked by an autho-
– The lights are turned on for approx. rized Porsche dealer.
30 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked.
The lights go out if the ignition is switched on
or when leaving the Welcome Home lighting.

74 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 75 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

The turn signal lever turns off automatically when


the steering wheel is straightened out after
completing a turn.

Lane changer
f To indicate your intention when changing lanes
on the freeway, slightly lift or depress the lever
to the resistance point.
The lever will return to the OFF position when
released.
f If the frequency of the display becomes notice-
ably faster, check the operation of the turn
signal bulbs.

Headlight flasher

Turn Signal / Headlight Dimmer / (With ignition on or off)


Parking light / Flasher Lever f To flash the headlights to oncomming
motorists, slightly pull the lever toward the
Turn signals, low beam and high beam are ready steering wheel and then release it.
for operation when the ignition is on. The blue indicator light in the tachometer will
1 – Turn signal left go on/off as you pull/release the lever.
2 – Turn signal right
Push the lever to the upper or lower pressure Parking light
point – turn signals flash three times
The parking light can only be switched on when
3 – High beam
the ignition is switched off.
4 – Headlight flasher
Lever in center position – Low beam f Move the lever up or down to switch on the
right or left parking light.
When high beam and headlight flasher are
selected, the blue indicator light in the tachometer
is lit.

Operation, Safety 75
10_GT3_21.book Seite 76 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f Always switch off windshield wipers in car 5 – Windshield wipers and washer system:
wash to prevent them wiping unintentionally f Pull wiper lever towards the steering wheel.
(sensor operation). The washer system sprays and wipes while the
lever is pulled towards the steering wheel.
f Always switch off windshield wipers before
When the wiper lever is released, a few drying
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional
wipes are executed.
operation (sensor operation).
A – Headlight washer (Vehicles with Bi-
f Do not operate the headlight washer in car
Xenon headlights):
washes.
The washer sprays only while low beam or high
f Do not operate headlight washer when it is beam is switched on.
frozen.
f Briefly push button A to operate headlight
washer system.
Front wiper and headlight washer system f If heavily soiled, repeat wash.

0 – Windshield wipers off The headlight washer system automatically sprays


1 – Rain sensor operation for front once for every ten times the front windshield
windshield wipers washer system is operated.
Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever f Move wiper lever upwards to the first click.
Please see the chapter “RAIN SENSOR” on Note
Warning! Page 77. The windshield washer nozzles are heated
Danger of injury when the windshield wipers 2 – Windshield wipers slow when the ignition is on, as a precaution against
operate unintentionally, e.g. in rain sensor f Move wiper lever upwards to the second click. freezing.
operation.
3 – Windshield wipers fast
Risk of damage to the windshield and wiper
f Move wiper lever upwards to the third click.
system.
4 – Front windshield wiper – one-touch
f Avoid running the wiper blades over a dry
operation:
windshield to prevent scratching the glass.
f Move wiper lever downwards. The front
Spray washer fluid on the windshield first.
windshield wipers wipe once.
A scratched windshield will reduce visibility.
f Always loosen wiper blades from frozen glass
before operating wipers to prevent damage to
the wiper motor or blades.

76 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 77 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

To switch the rain sensor on again: Maintenance note


f Move wiper lever to position 0 and then to f Periodically clean the wiper blades with a
position 1 or window cleaner, especially after the vehicle
has been washed in a car wash. We recom-
f Operate windshield washer system 5 or
mend Porsche window cleaner. If they are very
f Change the sensitivity of the rain sensor with dirty (e.g. with insect remains), they can be
four-stage switch A. cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
Switch-on is confirmed by one wipe of the If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this may be as
windshield. a result of the following:
On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package Plus, – If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
further rain sensor functions can be selected via wash, wax residues may be adhering to the
the PCM. windshield. These wax residues can only be
removed by using a window cleaner concen-
f Please see the chapter “Individual Memory” in
trate.
the separate PCM Owner’s Manual.
f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
Changing the sensitivity of the rain sensor Page 170.
Rain sensor Sensitivity can be set with switch A in 4 stages: f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer

The rain sensor on the windshield measures the f Adjust switch A upwards – for further information.

amount of rainfall (snowfall too). Wiper speed is high sensitivity. – The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
The setting is confirmed by one wipe of the
automatically adjusted accordingly.
windshield. f Replace damaged wiper blades as soon as
possible.
Switching on f Adjust switch A downwards –
f Move wiper lever upwards to the first click. low sensitivity.

Switching off
f Move wiper lever to position 0.
The rain sensor remains switched off if the wiper
lever is already in position 1 when the ignition is
switched on.

Operation, Safety 77
10_GT3_21.book Seite 78 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning! Hold and store speed


Risk of accident resulting in serious personal
f Bring the car to the desired speed with the
injury or death. A constant speed may not be
accelerator.
safe in heavy traffic, or on winding or
slippery roads. f Then briefly push the operating lever forward
With the speed control system engaged, the (position 1).
engine speed will not return to idle when
removing the foot from the accelerator Accelerating (e.g. to overtake)
pedal.
f Do not use the speed control when it may be Option 1
unsafe to keep the car at a constant speed. f Increase the speed as usual with the
accelerator.
f Observe all local and national speed limits.
When you ease off the accelerator, the
previously saved value is set again.
Switch automatic speed control
Option 2
readiness on
f Push operating lever forward (position 1) until
A- Automatic speed control readiness off/on f Press button A on the automatic speed control the desired speed is reached.
1- +SPEED/SET (accelerate/store) lever.
2- –SPEED (decelerate)
The speed reached is maintained and stored
3- OFF (interrupt) This green indicator light in the when the lever is released.
4- RESUME speedometer now indicates readiness
Option 3
Automatic Speed Control f Push lever slightly forwards (position 1)
(a maximum of 10 times).
The automatic speed control maintains any The speed is increased by 1 mph (1.6 km/h),
selected speed between 15 mph and 145 mph each time the lever is pushed forwards.
(30 km/h and 240 km/h) without you having to
use the accelerator pedal. Note on operation
The automatic speed control is operated with the
lever on the steering wheel. Speed control operation is automatically inter-
rupted if the speed is increased by more than
approx. 16 mph (25 km/h ) for longer than
20 seconds.

78 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 79 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Decelerating Interrupting automatic speed control Resuming the stored speed


operation
Option 1 f Briefly push operating lever upwards
f Pull operating lever downwards briefly (position 4).
f Pull operating lever towards the steering wheel
(position 3) or The speed control accelerates/decelerates
(position 2) until the desired speed is reached.
the vehicle to the stored speed.
The speed reached is maintained and stored f Operate brake or clutch pedal.
when the lever is released. The stored speed should only be recalled when
The speed driven before the interruption remains
traffic conditions and the road surface so permit.
Option 2 stored in the memory.

f Briefly move lever towards the steering wheel Automatic speed control operation is inter- Switching automatic speed control readi-
(position 2) (a maximum of 10 times). rupted automatically: ness off
The speed is reduced by 1 mph (1.6 km/h),
each time the lever is moved towards the
– If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more f Press button A on the automatic speed control
than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer than lever.
steering wheel.
20 seconds. The green readiness light in the speedometer
– If the actual vehicle speed falls to approx. goes off.
37 mph (60 km/h) below the set vehicle speed
for longer than 60 seconds (upward slopes). Note

– For PSM control operations. The stored speed value is cleared when the
vehicle is parked and the ignition is switched off.

Important note
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed
cannot always be maintained by the automatic
speed control.
f To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
engine-speed range, a lower gear needs to be
selected.

Operation, Safety 79
10_GT3_21.book Seite 80 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Cupholder
(holder for drink cans and cups)
f Keep the cupholder closed while driving.

Warning!
Risk of scalding or damage due to spilling
drinks.
f Only use beverage containers which fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Never place hot drinks in the cupholder.

Extending cupholder f Press the symbol for the respective cupholder.


f Close panel in the middle.
f Press the panel.
The panel opens. The cupholders can be pulled out to hold larger
containers.

80 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 81 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Closing cupholder
f Push cupholder drawer in.
f Open panel in the middle.
f Close and engage the cupholder.
f Close panel in the middle.

Pulling cupholder out Ashtray


f Pull out holder (arrow).
Opening
f Insert container.
f Open ashtray lid.
f Carefully slide holder inwards to adjust it to the
container size.

Operation, Safety 81
10_GT3_21.book Seite 82 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Emptying Cigarette lighter


f Open ashtray and carefully pull out ash insert. f Open ashtray lid.
f Leave ashtray lid open. f Push in knob of the cigarette lighter.
Push in ash insert. When ready for use, the lighter will snap back.

Warning! Note on operation

Danger of fire. The lighter receptacle is not to be used for


electrical accessories (except for the tire filling
f Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal, compressor).
as it could pose a fire hazard.
Maximum power consumption: 150 W
f Please see the chapter “SOCKETS” on
Page 207.

Cigarette Lighter
Warning!
Danger of fire and burning.
The cigarette lighter is ready for use, regard-
less of the ignition lock position.
f Never leave unsupervised children in the car.
f Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter.
f Hold the lighter by the knob only.

82 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 83 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Storage in the Passenger Compart- Additional storage possibilities


ment – in the doors,

Warning! – in the door sill next to the passenger’s seat,

Unsecured luggage and heavy objects may – in the center console,


come loose during braking, rapid directional – storage tray with coin holder between seats,
changes or in an accident and cause serious
personal injury or death. – glove compartment with CD and pen holder,

f Do not transport any heavy objects in the – clothes hook on the roof frame,
storage trays. – clothes hook on back of backrests (depending
f Do not carry unsecured luggage or objects in on vehicle equipment),
the passenger compartment. – storage space behind the seats.

Storage tray between the seats


Opening
f Press release button and lift the lid.
There is a coin holder and socket in the
forward part of the storage tray.
f Please see the chapter “SOCKETS” on
Page 207.

Operation, Safety 83
10_GT3_21.book Seite 84 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Glove compartment
Warning!
Risk of injury by the glove compartment lid in
case of an accident.
f Keep the glove compartment closed while
driving.

Opening CD holder
f Pull the catch and open the lid.
Occupied drawers are indicated by a red window.
Locking
Opening drawers
f Lock the catch to secure the contents against
unauthorized access. f Push the button of the drawer you wish to
open.

Closing drawers
f Fold up CD drawer and close until it engages.

Pen holder
A pen can be clipped in on the right side of the CD
holder.

84 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 85 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

The luggage compartment lid can also be


unlocked with the radio remote control.
f Please see the chapter “KEYS” on Page 18.

Important Note
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the luggage
compartment lid can be opened only by connec-
ting an external electrical power source.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
UNLOCKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPART-
MENT LID” on Page 210.
or the description inside the fuse box lid.

Warning message
A warning message in the on-board computer
comes on if the lids are not completely closed.
A - Opening luggage compartment lid
B - Opening engine compartment lid f Fully close the lid.

Luggage Compartment Lid and


Engine Compartment Lid
Unlocking
f Operate the appropriate pull-button next to the
driver’s seat.
The luggage compartment or engine compart-
ment is illuminated when the respective lid is
open.
f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF
AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 208.

Operation, Safety 85
10_GT3_21.book Seite 86 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Closing luggage compartment lid and


engine compartment lid
f Lower the lid and close it.
f Push the lid closed with the palm of your hand
in the area of the lock.
Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
lock.

Warning!
Risk of loss of control or an accident, resul-
ting in serious personal injury or death.
f Should you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it.
The front lid may fly up impairing vision.
Opening luggage compartment lid Luggage Compartment
Caution! Access cover A
Risk of damage to luggage compartment lid
or windshield wipers. Caution!

f Make sure that the windshield wipers are not Risk of injury or damage.
folded out forwards when opening the luggage f Do not store any objects behind the access
compartment lid. cover A.

f Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch


with the lever (arrow).

86 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 87 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Central locking wheel wrench socket


The wrench socket for releasing or fastening the
central locking wheels is located behind the
access cover B.
f Open access cover B using the opening.

Tire sealant
The tire sealant is located behind the access
cover C.
f Open access cover C using the opening.

Tools D- Tool kit


E- Towing lug
The tools are located under the floor plate of the F- Adapter for security wheel bolts
luggage compartment. G- Tire filling compressor

f Lift the floor plate on the opening and take out.

Operation, Safety 87
10_GT3_21.book Seite 88 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Danger!
Warning light
Risk of accident.
A warning message in the on-board computer If the warning message in the on-board
lights up when the unlocking handle is operated. computer lights up when the vehicle is in
motion, the lid may impact in front of the
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
windshield and can tear off.
lights light up.
You can lose control of the vehicle and
f Check the luggage compartment. serious personal injury or death may result.
f Close the lid. f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
Function with vehicle stationary
f Check the luggage compartment.
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking the handle, the lid can be opened from f Close the lid.
the inside immediately.
Note
Function with vehicle in motion
The lid cannot be opened from the inside if the
If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
Trunk Entrapment the unlocking handle when a speed of 2 mph
battery is disconnected or empty.
Safety reasons require that you unscrew the
Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk (3 km/h) is exceeded, the warning message in the latch striker of the lid lock if you plan to put
release mechanism. on-board computer lights up. the vehicle out of operation for an extended
At the same time, the lid is unlocked and the latch period.
A person trapped in the luggage compartment striker pops into the catch-hook position.
can release the lid from the inside using the f Please consult your authorized Porsche
unlocking handle. dealer.
The handle is fluorescent and glows in the dark. They will advise you about the necessary
measures.
Note
f When loading the luggage compartment, make
sure that items of luggage or other objects
cannot become caught on the handle.
This could cause the luggage compartment to
open unintentionally.

88 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 89 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Porsche Communication Accessories which have not been tested and Car Audio Operation/Tips
approved by Porsche may impair radio function
Management (PCM) and reception. For radio operation see your separate
f Refer to the separate Owner’s Manual before Owner’s Manual which is included with your
putting the PCM into operation. Navigation on-board literature.

f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF f Please see the chapter “LOAD SWITCH-OFF
When put into operation for the first time, a AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 208.
AFTER 2 HOURS OR 7 DAYS” on Page 208. distance of approx. 30 miles (50 km) must be
driven in order for the navigation system to FM reception
Warning! complete the process of fine calibration.
A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio.
There is a danger of accident if you set or The same applies when the tires are changed (e.g.
Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions
operate the on-board computer, radio, summer/snow tires) or new tires fitted.
are constantly changing.
navigation system, telephone or other equip- Full location accuracy is not yet achieved during
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from
ment when driving. the fine-calibration process.
other vehicles are all working against good recep-
This could distract you from the traffic and If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car tion.
cause you to lose control of the vehicle resul- train), the system may take a few minutes to deter- Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be
ting in serious personal injury or death. mine the current location after it has been problems when they are not.
f Operate the components while driving only if switched on.
The following characteristics are completely
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely. Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow) normal for a given reception area, and they do not
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation. indicate any problem with the radio itself.
procedures only with the vehicle stationary. When the battery has been disconnected, it may
Note
take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
The reception conditions for the radio module system is operational again. Electronic accessories should only be installed by
integrated in the PCM change continuously as you your authorized Porsche dealer.
drive. Interference from buildings, terrain and the Equipment which has not been tested and
weather is unavoidable. approved by Porsche may impair radio function
FM stereo reception is particularly susceptible to and reception.
varying reception conditions.
Electronic accessories should only be retrofitted
by your authorized Porsche dealer.

Operation, Safety 89
10_GT3_21.book Seite 90 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Fading and drifting Station swapping f When not in use, take the disc out of the player,
put the disc back into its case and store it
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km), When two FM stations are close to each other, and
away from dust, heat, damp and direct
except for some high power stations. an electronic dead spot, such as static or multi-
sunlight.
path area, interrupts the original signal,
If a vehicle is moving away from the desired Leaving the disc on the dashboard in the sun
sometimes the stronger second signal will be
station’s transmitter, the signal will tend to fade can damage the disc.
selected automatically until the original one
and/or drift. This condition is more prevalent with
returns. f If the disc gets dirty, clean the disc by wiping
FM than AM, and is often accompanied by distor-
This swapping can also occur as you drive away the surfaces from the center to the outside in
tion.
from the selected station and approach another a radial direction with a soft cloth.
Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
station of a stronger signal. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
degree by careful attention to fine tuning or selec-
anti-static record preservative.
tion of a stronger signal.
Compact disc player Disc cleaners are available in audio stores.
Static and fluttering
When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter
and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or
mountains, the radio sound may be accompanied
Caution!
with static or fluttering because of the characteri-
stic of FM. To avoid damage to compact disc player and
In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes discs.
heard when driving along a tree-lined road.
f Use only compact discs labeled as shown,
This static and fluttering can be reduced by adjus- having no dirt, damage or warpage.
ting the tone control for greater bass response
f Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part
until the disturbance has passed.
of the player unit.
Multipath Do not insert any object other than a disc into
the slot.
Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM, Remember there are no user-serviceable parts
direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna inside the compact disc player.
at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other
out. f Do not allow the disc to sustain any finger-
As a vehicle moves through these electronic dead prints, scrapes or stickers on the surfaces.
spots, the listener may hear a momentary flutter This may cause poor sound quality.
or loss of reception. Hold the disc only on the edge or center hole.

90 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 91 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Car Telephone and It is essential to observe the telephone


manufacturer's instructions before operating
Aftermarket Alarms the telephone.
Important legal and safety information Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which
regarding the use of cellular telephones is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
accordance with the technical requirements of
Some states may prohibit the use of cellular
Porsche.
telephones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws
and regulations on the use of cellular telephones The transmission power must not exceed
in the areas where you drive. 10 W.
The devices must possess a type approval for
Danger! your vehicle and have an “e” symbol.
Risk of an accident. If you should require equipment with transmission
Serious personal injury or death can result in power values greater than 10 W, please consult
the event of an accident. your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose.
Looking away from the road or turning your The dealer is familiar with the technical require-
attention away from your driving can cause ments for installing devices of this kind.
an accident and serious or fatal injury.
Antenna The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
When using your cellular telephone, you should transmitting antenna must be externally mounted.
f Always unscrew the external antenna before always:
The improper installation of radios or telephones
using an automatic car-wash.
f Give full attention to your driving - pull off the or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
road and park before making or answering a antenna inside the car may cause the warning
call if traffic conditions so require; and lights to come on.
f Keep both hands on the steering wheel - use Improper installation of such equipment can
hands-free operation (if available) - pull off the create a discharged battery or excessive current
road and park before using a hand-held draw from added equipment.
telephone.

Operation, Safety 91
10_GT3_21.book Seite 92 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

If aftermarket systems are installed by non-dealer-


ship technicians or outside the selling dealer,
problems may result. Installation of aftermarket
equipment is not covered under the New Car
Warranty.
f Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about
the installation of non Porsche approved equip-
ment.

Reception quality
The reception quality of your car telephone will
change constantly when you are driving. Interfe-
rence caused by buildings, landscape and
weather is unavoidable. It may become particu-
larly difficult to hear when using the hands-free
function due to external noise such as engine and
wind noise.

Automatic car-wash
f Unscrew external antennas before using an
automatic car-wash.

92 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 93 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

iPod AUX
External audio source
You can connect an iPod to the iPod interface with
the supplied connecting cable. You can connect an external audio source to the
AUX interface. This is operated at the audio
f Please see the chapter “iPod” in the separate
source itself and not on the PCM or CDR.
PCM Owner’s Manual.
f Please see the chapter “External audio source”
USB in the separate PCM or CDR Owner’s Manual.

You can connect a USB storage device to the USB


interface.
You can
– play audio data (compatible formats: MP3,
WMA and AAC-LC),
– download data from the optional Sport Chrono
Package Plus and
iPod, USB and AUX – download data of the PCM logbook.
The interfaces for iPod, USB and AUX are located f Please see the chapter “USB” in the separate
in the storage tray between the seats. PCM Owner’s Manual.
Note Note
Do not leave an iPod, USB storage device or an The LED display of a standard USB storage device
external audio source in the vehicle for a is turned away from the driver when connected to
prolonged period as extreme ambient conditions the USB interface.
(temperature fluctuations, air humidity) can occur
in the vehicle.

Operation, Safety 93
10_GT3_21.book Seite 94 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Note
f Pay attention to the final control date on the
fire extinguisher.
If the fire extinguisher is used after its expira-
tion date has elapsed, it may not operate
properly.
f Follow the operating instructions on the fire
extinguisher.
f The functional ability of the fire extinguisher
should be checked by a specialist workshop
every 1-2 years.
f After use, have the fire extinguisher refilled.

Fire Extinguisher Inserting fire extinguisher


In cars equipped with sport seats and fire
1. Place fire extinguisher in the mounting.
extinguisher, the extinguisher is fitted to the front
of the driver’s seat. 2. Engage fastening strap lug A in the tension
jack and close tension jack (arrow).
Taking out fire extinguisher
1. Hold fire extinguisher with one hand and press
the PRESS button on the fastening strap with
the other hand (arrow).
2. Remove fire extinguisher from mounting.

94 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 95 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning! Notes on operation


Risk of accident when using the HomeLink if f Always use the HomeLink opener in the
persons, animals or objects are within the direction of travel.
range of movement of the equipment that is Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
being operated. out.
f When using the HomeLink, ensure that no f Before selling the vehicle, delete the
persons, animals or objects are within the programmed signals of the HomeLink.
range of movement of the equipment that is
f Please read the instructions for the original
being operated.
hand-held transmitter to find out whether the
f Observe the safety notes for the original original transmitter is equipped with fixed or
hand-held transmitter. changeable code.
f Always fit new batteries in your hand-held trans-
Preconditions for operating and mitter before programming the transmitter.
programming the HomeLink:
Allocating signals to the buttons
– The battery in the original hand-held trans-
1, 2, 3 - Programmable buttons
mitter must be new. f Please follow the operating instructions for the
A - Light-emitting diode for status identification
original hand-held transmitter.
– Ignition is switched on.
HomeLink – Daytime running lights are switched off. Clearing factory settings prior to program-
ming the HomeLink for the first time
The programmable HomeLink replaces up to three
original hand-held transmitters used to operate To operate the respective device: The following process deletes the standard codes
various devices (e.g. garage door, gate to the set at the factory. Do not repeat the process if you
property, alarm system). f Press the appropriate button (1, 2 or 3). program further buttons.
Light-emitting diode A lights up during signal
You can program buttons 1 to 3 with a frequency f Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3
transfer.
of an original handheld transmitter. depressed for approx. 20 seconds until light-
emitting diode A begins to flash quickly.
All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
deleted.

Operation, Safety 95
10_GT3_21.book Seite 96 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Programming HomeLink with changeable Notes


code hand-held transmitters
Several attempts with different distances between
1. Press the desired button until the light-emitting the vehicle and the original hand-held transmitter
diode begins to flash slowly. might be necessary.
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform
The daytime running lights will flash once the
steps 2 and 3.
5 minutes have been exceeded. Programming
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx. must be repeated from the beginning in this case.
0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked
f Please consult your authorized Porsche dealer
position (figure) on the vehicle.
if you have not been able to successfully
3. Press the transmit button on the original hand- allocate signals for the garage door opener to
held transmitter until the daytime running lights the buttons even though you have carefully
flash three times (up to approx. 45 seconds). followed the instructions in this chapter and
the operating instructions for the original hand-
4. To synchronize the system:
held transmitter.
Press the programming button on the receiver
for the garage door actuator. Deleting programmed signals of the
Afterwards, you usually have approx. HomeLink
Programming HomeLink with fixed code 30 seconds to initiate step 5.
hand-held transmitters (e.g., when selling the vehicle)
5. Press the allocated HomeLink button twice.
1. Press the desired button until the light-emitting (With some devices, the button to be allocated Keep the two outer buttons 1 and 3 depressed
diode begins to flash slowly. must be pressed a third time in order to for approx. 20 seconds until light-emitting diode A
You then have approx. 5 minutes to perform complete the setting process.) begins to flash quickly.
steps 2 and 3. All programmed signals of buttons 1 to 3 are
6. Repeat the programming steps to allocate deleted.
2. Hold the original hand-held transmitter approx. other buttons.
0 to 12 in. (0 to 30 cm) in front of the marked
position (figure) on the vehicle.
3. Press the transmit button on the original hand-
held transmitter until the daytime running lights
flash three times (up to approx. 45 seconds).
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to allocate other buttons.

96 Operation, Safety
10_GT3_21.book Seite 97 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Automatic Air Conditioning System, Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating


Automatic Air Conditioning System ................ 98
Central and Side Vents ............................... 101
Fresh-air Intake .......................................... 101
Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating .... 102

Automatic Air Conditioning System, Heated Rear Window/Door Mirror Heating 97


10_GT3_21.book Seite 98 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

A- Defrosting the windshield


B- Heated rear window/door mirror heating
C- Temperature sensor
D- AC OFF button (air-conditioning compressor off/on)
E- Recirculating-air button
F- Temperature button
G- AUTO button (automatic mode)
H- Air distribution to footwell
I - Air distribution to central and side vents
J- Air distribution to windshield
K- Blower speed button

Automatic Air Conditioning System Automatic mode


The automatic air-conditioning system controls f Press AUTO button G.
the preselected interior temperature completely AUTO will appear on the display panel.
automatically. Air quantity and distribution are automatically
If necessary, the automatic system can be controlled and variations are compensated.
manually adjusted.
All automatic setting functions can be individually
changed.
This setting is retained until the appropriate
function button is pressed again or the AUTO
button is pressed.

98 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating


10_GT3_21.book Seite 99 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Setting temperature Defrosting the windshield Adjusting blower speed


f Press button F upwards or downwards
f Press button A (switch on or off). f Press button K upwards or downwards respec-
respectively.
The windshield is defogged or defrosted as tively.
To suit personal comfort, the interior temperature quickly as possible. The preset blower speed is increased or decre-
can be adjusted between 61 °F and 85 °F/16 °C Air flows to the windshield only. ased.
and 29.5 °C. The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
The speed stages are indicated by a bar display.
Recommendation: 72 °F/22 °C.
AC OFF – switching compressor for air- If the button is pressed downwards at the lowest
If “LO” or “HI” appears on the display, the system
conditioning system on and off blower stage, the blower and automatic control
is operating at maximum cooling or heating
are switched off. “OFF” will appear on the display
power.
The air-conditioning compressor switches off field.
Automatic control is no longer active.
automatically at temperatures below approx. Pressing the button upwards or pressing the
Note 37 °F/3 °C and cannot be switched on, even AUTO button switches the blower and automatic
manually. control back on again.
If the preselected temperature is changed, the
blower speed can increase automatically in Whenever outside temperatures exceed approx.
automatic mode. 37 °F/3 °C, the air-conditioning compressor is Recirculating-air setting
The desired temperature is reached more quickly always switched on in automatic mode.
this way. The compressor can be switched off to save fuel,
but control comfort is then limited: Warning!
Sensors
f Press AC OFF button D. Risk of accident due to impaired vision,
To avoid affecting the performance of the air- The compressor is switched off. resulting in serious personal injury or death.
conditioning system: The light-emitting diode in the button lights up. In recirculating-air setting, the windows may
fog up.
f Do not cover the sun sensor on the instrument f If the interior temperature is too high, switch
panel or the temperature sensor C. compressor back on or press AUTO button. f Only select recirculating-air setting for short
periods.
To dry incoming air in damp weather, do not
switch off the air-conditioning compressor. f If the windows fog up, switch recirculating-air
This prevents fogging of windows. setting off immediately by pressing the
circulating-air button again and select the
“Defrost windshield” function.

Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating 99


10_GT3_21.book Seite 100 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Switching recirculating-air setting on or off Air distribution to footwell General instructions for air-conditioning
f Press button E. compressor
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only f Press button H.
– Can switch off briefly if engine is under an
the inside air is circulated. The air flows to the footwell.
extreme load to ensure sufficient engine
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up. The selection appears on the display panel.
cooling.
Over approx. 37 °F/3 °C Air distribution to central and side
– Switches off automatically at temperatures
vents
If the air-conditioning compressor was off, it below approx. 37 °F/3 °C and cannot be
switches on automatically. The duration of recircu- f Press button I. switched on, even manually.
lating-air setting is not limited. The air flows from the central and side vents.
– Operates most effectively with windows
Vents must be open.
closed.
Below approx. 37 °F/3 °C The selection appears on the display panel.
If the car has been in the sun for a long time, it
The air-conditioning compressor is switched off. Air distribution to windshield is a good idea to ventilate the interior briefly
Recirculating-air setting is automatically ended with the windows open.
after approx. 3 minutes.
f Press button J. – Depending on the outside temperature and
The air flows to the windshield. humidity, condensation can drip from the
Air distribution The selection appears on the display panel. evaporator and form a pool under the vehicle.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage.
The individual air distributions can be combined as Note on operation
desired. – If uncooled air flows out when the lowest
f On vehicles with the Sport Chrono Package temperature has been set, switch off the air-
Recommended setting in Summer: Plus, individual air conditioning settings can be conditioning compressor and have the fault
Air distribution to central and side vents. stored on your vehicle key. repaired at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Recommended setting in Winter: Please see the chapter “Individual Memory” in
Air distribution to footwell and windshield. the separate PCM Owner’s Manual.

100 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
10_GT3_21.book Seite 101 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Fresh-air Intake
To ensure proper air intake:
f Keep the fresh-air inlet between the luggage
compartment lid and the windshield free from
snow, ice and leaves.

A - Continuous opening and closing


B - Setting vent direction
Changing air flow direction
f Move the vanes to make the air flow in the
Central and Side Vents desired direction.
Outside air or conditioned air can be delivered
Opening vents
from all vents, depending on the air-distribution
setting on the operating panel.
f Rotate knurled wheel upward.

Closing vents
f Rotate knurled wheel downward.

Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating 101
10_GT3_21.book Seite 102 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Switching on
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button lights up.
After approx. 15 minutes, the heating switches off
automatically.
The heater can be switched back on by pressing
the button again.

Switching off
f Press button.
The light-emitting diode in the button goes out.

Heated Rear Window/Door


Mirror Heating
The heated rear window/door mirror heating is
ready for operation when the ignition is on.

102 Automatic air conditioning system, Heated rear window/Door mirror heating
10_GT3_21.book Seite 103 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings


Instrument Panel USA Models...................... 104
Instrument Panel Canada Models ................. 106
Engine Oil Temperature .............................. 108
Automatic Speed Control Indicator light ....... 108
Instrument Illumination ................................ 108
Trip Odometer ........................................... 109
Speedometer............................................. 110
Changing over between Miles / Kilometers... 110
Tachometer ............................................... 111
Turn Signal Indicator Light .......................... 111
High Beam Indicator Light ........................... 111
Upshift indicator......................................... 111
Cooling System.......................................... 112
Fuel........................................................... 113
Clock ........................................................ 114
Outside Temperature.................................. 114
Engine Oil Pressure .................................... 115
Check Engine (Emission Control) ................. 116
On-Board Computer (BC)............................. 117
Warnings on the instrument panel and the
on-board computer..................................... 148

Instruments, On-Board Computer, Warnings 103


10_GT3_21.book Seite 104 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instrument Panel USA Models 15.Light sensor for instrument illumination When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lights light up for a lamp check.
16.Airbag warning light
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
the Owner’s Manual. 17.Check Engine warning light Note
(Emission control warning light) Warnings that have been given are stored in the
1.Engine oil temperature gauge
18.Central warning light appropriate control unit memory and can be read
2.Speedometer with analogue display out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
19.On-board computer display
3.Tire pressure warning light This information can help to warn you about situa-
20.Porsche Stability Management tions which may be hazardous to you or your car.
4.Turn signal indicator light, left
PSM Multifunctional light
5.Tachometer
21.Brake warning light
6.High beam indicator light
22.Safety belt warning light
7.Turn signal indicator light, right
23.ABS warning light
8.Upshift indicator
24.Clock and outside temperature display
9.Cooling system
25.Adjustment button for clock
Temperature gauge, warning light
10.Fuel
Level gauge, warning light
11.Engine oil pressure gauge
12.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
13.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
14.Automatic speed control indicator light

104 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 105 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instruments, On-Board Computer 105


10_GT3_21.book Seite 106 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instrument Panel Canada Models 15.Light sensor for instrument illumination When the ignition is switched on, the warning
lights light up for a lamp check.
16.Airbag warning light
Also refer to the corresponding chapters in
the Owner’s Manual. 17.Check Engine warning light Note
(Emission control warning light) Warnings that have been given are stored in the
1.Engine oil temperature gauge
18.Central warning light appropriate control unit memory and can be read
2.Speedometer with analogue display out at an authorized Porsche dealer.
19.On-board computer display
3.Tire pressure warning light This information can help to warn you about situa-
20.Porsche Stability Management tions which may be hazardous to you or your car.
4.Turn signal indicator light, left
PSM Multifunctional light
5.Tachometer
21.Brake warning light
6.High beam indicator light
22.Safety belt warning light
7.Turn signal indicator light, right
23.ABS warning light
8.Upshift indicator
24.Clock and outside temperature display
9.Cooling system
25.Adjustment button for clock
Temperature gauge, warning light
10.Fuel
Level gauge, warning light
11.Engine oil pressure gauge
12.Adjustment button for instrument illumination
and trip counter
13.Odometer and daily trip mileage display
14.Automatic speed control indicator light

106 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 107 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instruments, On-Board Computer 107


10_GT3_21.book Seite 108 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instrument Illumination
The illumination is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness by the light sensor in the
tachometer.
In addition, when the car lights are switched on,
the instrument and switch symbol brightness can
be manually adjusted.

Warning!
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
spokes while driving.

Note
A - Adjustment button for instrument illumination and
Engine Oil Temperature trip counter
When the car lights are switched on, the instru-
ment lighting for light dials switches on and off
automatically depending on the ambient bright-
The engine oil temperature is indicated in the left Automatic Speed Control ness.
instrument. Indicator light
Indicates automatic speed control readiness.

108 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 109 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Resetting to zero
f Press adjustment button A for approximately
one second or
f Reset the distance in the “SET” menu of the on-
board computer.
Please see the chapter “SET BASIC SETTING
ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on Page 145.
After exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999 kilometers,
the counter returns to “0”.

Dimming instrument illumination Trip Odometer


f Turn adjustment button A in the appropriate
direction and hold it until the desired bright- Warning!
ness has been reached. Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
The chosen level of brightness is indicated by a in serious personal injury or death.
bar display in the display field of the on-board f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
computer. spokes while driving.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 109


10_GT3_21.book Seite 110 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Speedometer Changing over between


The digital speedometer is integrated in the on-
Miles / Kilometers
board computer. The units of the distance and speed displays can
The indication changes from mph to km/h when be changed in the “SET” menu of the on-board
the units are changed from miles to kilometers. computer.
f Please see the chapter “SET BASIC SETTING
ON ON-BOARD COMPUTER” on Page 145.

110 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 111 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Caution!
Upshift indicator
To avoid severe engine damage. In addition to the red zone on the tachometer
scale, the upshift arrow also prompts you to
f Always observe the engine rpm before down-
initiate the gear shift in good time.
shifting to a lower gear, so you do not exceed
the maximum engine rpm. f When the upshift indicator lights up, change to
next-higher gear.
Turn Signal Indicator Light
Flashes in synchronism with the turn signals.
Left arrow – left turn signals
Right arrow – right turn signals
f If the frequency of the display becomes notice-
ably faster, check the operation of the turn
signals.

Tachometer High Beam Indicator Light


Lights when high beam or headlight flasher is
The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolu-
switched on.
tions per minute (rpm).
The indicator light goes out when the high beams
The beginning of the red marks at the right end of
are switched off.
the scale indicates the maximum permissible
engine rpm. The indicator light flashes in the event of cornering
A speed limiter prevents the engine from being light failure.
overrevved during acceleration. Before reaching
this area, the next higher gear should be
selected.
Shift to the next lower gear when the engine rpm
drops below 1,500 rpm.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 111


10_GT3_21.book Seite 112 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Pointer in the middle – normal operating tempe- If the coolant level is too low, the warning light
rature flashes.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
The pointer may move up to the red area when
computer.
engine is heavily loaded and outside temperature
is high, but should return to “normal” when engine f Switch engine off and allow to cool.
load is reduced.
f Add coolant after the engine has cooled to the
touch.
Warning light “A”
f Have the cause of the fault remedied at an
If the coolant temperature is too high, the authorized Porsche dealer.
warning light comes on. Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board Page 158.
computer.
Caution!
f Pull off the road, turn off the engine and allow
to cool. Risk of engine damage.
f Check radiator and air passages in front end of f If the warning lights come on even though
car for obstructions. coolant level is correct, do not continue
Cooling System driving.
f Check coolant level.
If necessary, add coolant and have fault f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer. authorized Porsche dealer.
Temperature gauge (ignition on) Please see the chapter “COOLANT LEVEL” on
Page 158.
USA: Display in °F Engine compartment blower fan
Canada: Display in °C Note
In addition, this warning light flashes to indicate a
Pointer to the left – engine cold To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling- fault in the engine compartment blower fan.
air passages must not be restricted by coverings
f Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine f Have the cause of the fault remedied at an
(e.g. films, “stone guards”).
loading. authorized Porsche dealer.

112 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 113 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Note If the level gauge warning light flashes, there


has been a system fault.
If a small quantity of fuel is added to a nearly
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
empty fuel tank, the fuel gauge cannot measure
computer.
the added fuel accurately. The „remaining range“
There will then be no reserve warning.
readout will also be incorrect.
f To remedy the fault, go to an authorized
Warning light “A” Porsche dealer.

When the engine is running, the warning light


of the level gauge lights up if less than approx.
2.6 U.S. gallons (10 liters) of fuel remains in the
tank.
Additionally, a warning is displayed in the on-board
computer.
f Fill up at the next opportunity.

Caution!
Fuel To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine.
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
Level gauge
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
When the ignition is on the fuel level is displayed. lights have come on.

f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on f Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
Page 239. SYSTEM” on Page 168.
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. going up
or downhill), minor deviations in the indication may
occur.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 113


10_GT3_21.book Seite 114 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Setting the time Leaving adjustment mode


Automatically after one minute or:
Warning!
f Press adjustment button again.
Risk of loss of control or accident, resulting
in serious personal injury or death. When adjustment mode is deliberately left by
pressing the button, the time begins precisely to
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel the second.
spokes while driving.
Note
f Switch ignition on.
The time mode can be changed between 12h and
Setting hours 24h in the on-board computer.

f Press adjustment button A for about one Outside Temperature


second.
Hour display flashes. The outside temperature display C does not
indicate, if ice is on the road.
f Turn button in the appropriate direction: Even if a temperature above 32 °F (0 °C) is
to right – increase hours figure displayed, ice may still form on the road, for
A - Adjustment button for clock to left – decrease hours figure. instance on bridges or when the road passes
B - Clock through a heavily shaded area.
C - Outside temperature display Adjustment in hours – turn button briefly
Fast adjustment (display cycles) –
Clock turn and hold button.

The clock is blanked out approximately four Setting minutes


minutes after the ignition is switched off or when
the car is locked. f Press adjustment button again.
Minutes display flashes.
f Set by rotating as in hours mode.

114 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 115 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

If oil pressure drops abruptly and a message


is displayed on the on-board computer when
Battery
the engine is running on or when driving:
If the battery voltage drops abruptly, a warning
f Stop immediately in a suitable place. message will be displayed by the on-board
computer.
f Switch off the engine.
f Check whether there is an obvious oil leak on If the warning is displayed by the on-board
or under the car. computer while the engine is running or while
driving:
f If no oil leak can be detected:
Measure the oil level using the on-board f Stop the car in a safe place and stop the
computer with the engine idling. engine.
Please see the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL” Possible causes
on Page 143. – Defect in the battery charging system.
f Add engine oil if necessary. – Broken drive belt.
Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 160. Warning!
Engine Oil Pressure
Risk of engine damage with resultant loss of
Caution!
With the engine warmed up and running at a speed control and accident, leading to serious
of 3000 rpm, the engine oil pressure should be Risk of engine damage. personal injury or death.
approx. 3.5 bar or higher. A broken drive belt means there is no power
f Do not continue driving if there is an obvious oil
assistance to the steering (more effort is
leak.
required to steer) and coolant pump function
f Do not continue driving if the warning lights will stop.
come on even though oil level is correct.
f Do not continue driving.
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest autho-
authorized Porsche dealer.
rized Porsche dealer.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 115


10_GT3_21.book Seite 116 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Check Engine If the warning light in the instrument panel lights up Central Warning Light
permanently without flashing before and remains
(Emission Control) on while driving, it suggests:
The central warning light on the instrument panel
Warning Light – a potential engine control problem and the lights up if there are warning messages in the
need for system service or INFO menu.
The emission control system detects malfunctions – an improperly fastened tank cap or The messages can be called in the on-board
early that could, for example, cause increased computer INFO menu:
pollutant emissions or consequential damage. – the vehicle was refueled while the engine was
Faults are indicated by a continuously lit or running. f Please see the chapter “INFO WARNING
MESSAGES” on Page 123.
flashing instrument panel warning light. f Stop immediately at a suitable and secure
The faults are recorded in the control unit's fault place and check tank cap for proper fastening.
memory. If tank cap was fastened correctly, see your
Brake Warning Light USA
The warning light in the instrument panel lights up authorized Porsche dealer for service as soon Brake Warning Light Canada
when the ignition is switched on as a bulb check as possible.
The warning light on the instrument panel lights
and goes out approx. 4 seconds after the engine
Caution! up:
starts. If the warning light does not light up, have
the bulb replaced promptly. If the check engine warning light in the – if the handbrake is on,
The warning light in the instrument panel flashes to instrument panel is flashing, serious – if the brake fluid level is low,
indicate operating states (e.g. engine misfiring) catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. – if the brake pads have reached the wear limit,
which might cause damage to certain parts of the
emission control system. Prolonged driving with the check engine – if the brake circuit division is defective.
warning light on could cause damage to the
f In this case, immediately reduce the engine Additionally, a warning is displayed by the on-
emission control system. It also could affect
load by easing off the accelerator. board computer.
fuel economy and driveability.
f In order to avoid consequential damage to the f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
f Have the fault remedied at the nearest
engine or emission control system (e.g. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
catalytic converter), have the fault diagnosed COMPUTER” on Page 148.
and rectified immediately at the nearest autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

116 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 117 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Operating lever
The on-board computer is operated with the lower
left lever on the steering column.

Selecting functions of the on-board


computer
f Push lever up 3 or down 4.

Confirming selection (Enter)


f Push the lever forward 1.

Moving back one or several selection levels


f Pull the lever back 2 once or several times or
f Select the arrow on the on-board
computer display with the operating lever and
push the operating lever forward 1.
On-Board Computer (BC) Operation, controls
Note
It is not possible to describe all details of the on-
Display field board computer functions in this Owner’s Manual. You can always return to the basic menu by pulling
However, the examples will quickly familiarize you the operating lever several times.
The display field is beneath the tachometer.
with the operational principle and help you to
navigate through the menu structure. 5 - Button for voice control
Readiness for operation f Please refer to the separate Owner’s Manual
You can restore the factory default settings at any
for Porsche Communication Management
– With ignition switched on, time by using the “SET” menu.
(PCM).
– with engine running.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 117


10_GT3_21.book Seite 118 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Basic setting
– Central display: .... Radio station
The central line B of the on-board computer can
be selected in the SET menu.

Calling on-board computer functions in


display “C”
f Push operating lever up or down
(selection field D must be switched off).
The following displays can be called step by step:
– Average speed (ø mph),
– Average consumption (ø mpg),
– Range on remaining fuel (mls ),
– Tire pressure
A - Digital speedometer
– Navigation information
B - Central display
C - Bottom display (if activated in the SET menu).

Note
Functions and display possibilities
The values “Average speed”, “Average consump-
Note tion” and “Daily trip mileage” can be reset to zero
in the SET menu.
The available items and displays in the on-board
computer depend on the equipment of your
vehicle. For this reason it is possible that some
of the items and displays shown here are not
available in your on-board computer.

118 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 119 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

D - Switching selection field on or off E - Arrow symbol for continuation The following menus are available, depending on
vehicle equipment:
f Push operating lever forward or back. Arrow symbol:
1. LIMIT
f Push operating lever down in order to page
through the menu. 2. INFO

Arrow symbol: 3. TEL

f Push operating lever up in order to page 4. CHRONO


through the menu. 5. AUDIO
6. NAVI
7. OIL
8. TPM
9. SET

Instruments, On-Board Computer 119


10_GT3_21.book Seite 120 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

LIMIT
Acoustic warning signal for speed limit
The acoustic warning signal can be activated for
speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
The signal sounds when the preset speed is
exceeded.
For the signal to sound again, the driving speed
must fall below the preset speed by at least
3 mph (5 km/h).

Switching on selection field “D”


f Push operating lever forward.

Setting the speed f Push operating lever forward.


f Select LIMIT with the operating lever.

120 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 121 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Option 1: Option 2: f Select “xx mph” with the operating lever.


Accepting current speed Presetting speed
f Push operating lever forward.
f Push operating lever forward. f Select “LIMIT active” with the operating lever:
The acoustic warning signal is activated for the
not active
current speed.
active
Display:
If the vehicle is stationary, the message “Cannot f If “not active”, push the operating lever
be accepted with car stopped” is displayed. forward.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 121


10_GT3_21.book Seite 122 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Switching the acoustic warning signal off


f Select “LIMIT active” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
Display:

f Push operating lever slightly up or down until


the desired speed is reached.

upwards: speed is increased


downwards: speed is decreased

Note
Holding the lever up or down for a longer period
will adjust the speed in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h).
f Push operating lever forward.

122 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 123 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

INFO f Push operating lever forward. f Push operating lever forward.


Warning messages f Select “Messages” with the operating lever. f Push operating lever forwards or pull
backwards.
Switching on selection field “D” f Push operating lever forward.
The display returns to the Info menu.
f Push operating lever forward. Any existing warning messages can be called
using the operating lever.
Calling warning messages You also can call warning messages which were
cancelled during the trip (but only until the next
f Select INFO with the operating lever.
time the ignition is switched on).

Instruments, On-Board Computer 123


10_GT3_21.book Seite 124 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Service TEL f Push operating lever forward.


Telephone information
Switching on selection field “D”
Switching on selection field “D”
f Push operating lever forward.
f Push operating lever forward.
Recalling service information
Recalling telephone information
f Select INFO with the operating lever.
f Select TEL with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
f Select “Service” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
f The time until the next service is displayed in
miles and days.

124 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 125 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Note Example: f Push operating lever forward.


Selecting from the telephone book and
You can recall phone calls, e.g. calls that arrived f Select a person to call and push the operating
calling
during your absence, via the menu item “Missed lever forward.
calls”. f Select “Phone book” with the operating lever. The connection is established.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 125


10_GT3_21.book Seite 126 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f Push the operating lever forward to end the Incoming call


call.
f Select “Accept” or “Refuse” and push the
operating lever forward.

Note
Rejected phone calls can be recalled with the
menu item “Missed calls”.

126 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 127 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Stopwatch on the instrument panel Note on operation


The stopwatch has an analogue and a digital When you leave the CHRONO menu while the
display. stopwatch is running, measurement will continue.
The large pointer of the analogue display
The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched
measures the seconds. The two small pointers
off. If the ignition is switched on again within
measure hours and minutes. The display re-starts
approx. 4 minutes, the stopwatch will continue to
at zero after 12 hours.
run.
Seconds and increments of 1/100th of a second
can be read on the digital display. The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is by
The digital display and the display in the on-board selecting “Reset” in the CHRONO menu.
computer can indicate up to 99 hours and
59 minutes.
The stopwatch can be swivelled both to the left
and to the right.

Stopwatch displays:
– on the stopwatch on the instrument panel,
CHRONO
Stopwatch – in the on-board computer menu CHRONO,
– on the performance display in the PCM.
You can use the stopwatch to measure time inter-
vals, e.g. on the race circuit or on work-related Starting/stopping stopwatch
journeys. Measured lap times can be stored and
evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche All stopwatch displays are started and stopped via
Communication Management (PCM). the on-board computer menu CHRONO.

f Please see the chapter “Sport display” in the


separate PCM Owner’s Manual.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 127


10_GT3_21.book Seite 128 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Starting the timing f Push operating lever forward. f Push operating lever forward.
The time runs on all stopwatch displays.
f Push operating lever forward.
The on-board computer display changes to the
The selection field is switched on.
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection.
f Select CHRONO with the operating lever.
PCM information
The performance display in the “Trip/Sport
display” menu must be selected in order to
analyse the data in the PCM.

128 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 129 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Stopping the timing f Push lever forward. Continue timing


The time is stopped in all stopwatch displays,
After time measurement is started, the on-board After timing has been stopped, the on-board
and the on-board computer display changes to
computer display changes to the “Stop timing/ computer display changes to the “Continue/
the “Continue/Reset” selection.
Intermediate time”. Reset” selection.
The timing can be continued or reset to zero.
f Select “Stop timing” with the operating lever.
PCM information
After timing has been stopped, a prompt asking
whether the time is to be stored appears on the
PCM.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 129


10_GT3_21.book Seite 130 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f Push operating lever forward. Resetting the time f Push operating lever forward.
The stopwatch displays continue the timing. The display returns to the “Start timing”
After timing has been stopped, the on-board
selection.
The on-board computer display returns to the computer display changes to the “Continue/
The stopwatch displays in the instrument panel
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection. You Reset” selection.
and the on-board computer are reset to zero.
can stop the stopwatch or measure an inter-
f Select “Reset” with the operating lever.
mediate time.

130 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 131 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

A - Lap To display an intermediate time: f Select “Intermediate time” with the operating
B - Intermediate time lever and push the operating lever forwards.
After timing has been started, the on-board
Displaying intermediate times computer display changes to the “Stop timing/ The intermediate time will be displayed for
Intermediate time” selection. approx. 5 seconds.
Several intermediate times can be displayed for a
route or for a lap on the race circuit. The interme-
diate times B are for your information.
Measured lap times A can be stored and evalu-
ated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche
Communication Management (PCM).

Instruments, On-Board Computer 131


10_GT3_21.book Seite 132 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

The on-board computer display then returns to the In order to start timing a new lap: The new lap is displayed on the on-board
“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection. computer and the PCM. Timing on the on-board
The “New lap?” selection appears for 5 seconds
f You can stop the stopwatch or measure
computer and on the PCM begins from zero. The
after selection of “Intermediate time”.
stopwatch in the instrument panel continues to
another intermediate time.
f Select “New lap?” with the operating lever and show the total time.
push the operating lever forwards.

132 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 133 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f The on-board computer display returns to the AUDIO NAVI


“Stop timing/Intermediate time” selection after
a short period. Switching on selection field “D” Switching on selection field “D”
f You can stop the stopwatch or measure f Push operating lever forward. f Push operating lever forward.
another intermediate time or a new lap.
Selecting a radio station Select destination
PCM information f Select “AUDIO” with the operating lever. f Select “NAVI” with the operating lever.
If you wish to store the lap time in the PCM, the f Push operating lever forward. f Push operating lever forward.
performance display in the “Trip/Sport display”
menu of the PCM must be selected. f Select the desired station. f Select the desired function with the operating
lever:
f Push the operating lever up or down.
– Last destinations
– Destination memory
– Route guidance

Instruments, On-Board Computer 133


10_GT3_21.book Seite 134 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f The driver is responsible for filling the tires f Do not drive with tires whose tire pressure
correctly and making the correct settings on drops again in a short period of time. In cases
the on-board computer. of doubt, have tires checked by an authorized
Porsche dealer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring offers the following
functions: f Damaged tires must be immediately replaced
by an authorized Porsche dealer.
– Display of the actual tire pressure while the
Tire repairs are not permissible under any
vehicle is in motion.
circumstances.
– Display of the deviation from the required
f If a fault occurs in the Tire Pressure Monitoring
pressure (refilling pressure).
(e.g. defective wheel transmitter), contact an
– Display of currently set tire type. authorized Porsche dealer immediately and
have the damage repaired.
– Tire pressure warnings in two stages.
The tire pressure will not be monitored at all or
will be monitored only partially by defective
Warning!
Tire Pressure Monitoring.
Despite the advantages offered by the Tire f Tires lose air over time without a tire defect
Pressure Monitoring, it is still the driver’s being present. A tire pressure warning will then
TPM responsibility to update the corresponding appear in the on-board computer display.
Tire Pressure Monitoring settings in the on-board computer and Correct the tire pressure at the next oppor-
maintain the pressure in the tires.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR Low tire pressure reduces the road safety of
tunity.
COLD TIRES 68 °F/20 °C” on Page 237. the vehicle and destroys the tire and wheel. f The Tire Pressure Monitoring gives a warning
about tire damage due to natural pressure loss
The Tire Pressure Monitoring continuously f When a flat tire has been displayed, immedia- as well as about a gradual loss of pressure due
monitors tire pressure and tire temperature on all tely stop in a suitable place and check the tires
four wheels and warns the driver when the tire to foreign objects.
for damage. If necessary, remedy the damage The Tire Pressure Mnitoring cannot warn you
pressure is too low. with a tire sealant. about tire damage that occurs suddenly (e.g.
The display as well as the settings for the Tire f Do not by any means continue to drive with flat tire due to abrupt external effects).
Pressure Monitoring take place on the on-board damaged tires.
computer.
However, you must still adjust the tire pressure on f Sealing the tire with tire sealant is only an
the wheel. emergency repair, so you can drive to the next
authorized Porsche dealer. The maximum
permitted speed is 50 mph (80 km/h).

134 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 135 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning!
This display is for informational purposes
only. Under no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.
Changing the tire pressure to incorrect
pressures could adversely affect the perfor-
mance, driving characteristics, and safety of
your vehicle.
f Maintain tire pressures according to the units
indicated on the tire pressure plate, located on
the drivers side door of the vehicle.

Displaying the tire pressure function of the


on-board computer
f Push operating lever up or down until the tire
pressure function of the on-board computer
Tire pressure function of the on-board appears. Pressure info in tire pressure menu
computer (The selection field must be switched off.)
In accordance with physical principles, the air
The tire pressure function of the on-board pressure changes as the temperature changes.
computer displays the tire pressures (actual The tire pressure increases or decreases by
pressure) dependent on temperature in the four around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18 °F (10 °C)
wheels. change in temperature.
You can watch the tire pressure rise as the tempe-
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relation-
rature increases while driving.
ship between tire pressure and temperature into
This display is only for information.
account.
f Under no circumstances should the tire
f Please see the chapter “PRESSURE INCREASE
pressures be changed based on this display.
AS THE RESULT OF TEMPERATURE
INCREASE” on Page 142.
You can read the tire pressures to be
corrected in this display.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 135


10_GT3_21.book Seite 136 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

The tire pressure to be corrected (refill pressure)


is indicated on the displayed wheel.
Example: If “ –1.5 psi (–0.1 bar)” is displayed,
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) must be added to this tire.

Note
The tire pressure menu can only be called up when
the vehicle is stationary.

Calling up the “Info pressure” display


f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
f Select “Info pressure” with the operating lever.
Tire type info in tire pressure menu f Select “Info tires” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
Information about the currently set tires: f Push operating lever forward.
Note
– Tire type: Summer tires, winter tires Tire selection in the “Set” menu
After the ignition is switched on, it can take up to
approx. 1 minute before all tire pressures are “Info tires” shows the current tire settings. f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
displayed. Dashes (“-.-”) appear instead of the tire on the selection field.
Calling up the “Info tires” display
pressures. f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward in order to switch
on the selection field.
f Select “TPM” with the operating lever.
f Push operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.

136 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 137 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f Push operating lever forward. f Select “Set” with the operating lever. f Push the operating lever forward.
The display changes to the tire pressure menu.
f Select desired tire type:
summer or winter.
f Push operating lever forward.
A display for confirming the selected type of
tire appears.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 137


10_GT3_21.book Seite 138 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Note
The message “Process aborted” appears if the
setting process is interrupted. All entries made up
to this point are lost, and the original settings
remain in effect.
Only if the message “Process complete” appears
after the settings have been made will the Tire
Pressure Monitoring re-learn the wheels.
f Please see the chapter “SYSTEM LEARNING”
on Page 140.
Before fitting tires with sizes which are not stored
in the on-board computer, the missing information
should be supplemented in the on-board
computer.
f Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.
f Select “Continue” and push the operating lever The tire selection has only been successfully
completed when the message “Process f Use only tires approved by Porsche.
forward.
complete” is displayed by the on-board computer. The available items in the tire pressure menu
f Select arrow (Back) and push the operating depend on the equipment of your vehicle. For this
lever forward. The display returns to the tire reason it is possible that some of the items shown
pressure menu. here are not available on your on-board
The on-board computer additionally displays computer’s display.
the message “System learning”. f Make sure that tire pressures correspond to
the on-board computer settings. Correct the
tire pressure if necessary.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
COLD TIRES 68 °F/20 °C” on Page 237.

138 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 139 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Tire pressure warnings


The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel and a corresponding message on the on-
board computer warn about loss of pressure in
two stages, depending on the amount of pressure
loss.
Driving with insufficient tire pressure reduces the
road safety of the vehicle and destroys the tire and
wheel.

Stage 1 – Add air


The pressure in the tire is too low by 4 to 7 psi (0.3
to 0.5 bar).
f The tire pressure warning contains the
affected tire with the tire pressure to be added.
Correct the tire pressure at the next
opportunity. This tire pressure warning appears
Stage 2 – Flat tire
– for approx. 10 seconds with vehicle stopped
At speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h):
when switching off the ignition or
The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
– again when switching on the ignition.
than 7 psi (0.5 bar). This significant pressure
With ignition on, the warning can be deactivated. loss is a danger to road safety.
The tire pressure warning light in the instrument At speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h):
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has
The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
been corrected.
than 5 psi (0.4 bar). This significant pressure
loss is a danger to road safety.
f When the tire pressure warning appears, stop
immediately at a suitable location. Check the
indicated tire for signs of damage. If neces-
sary, fill in tire sealant and set the correct tire
pressure.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 139


10_GT3_21.book Seite 140 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

This tire pressure warning also appears when System learning The wheel learning process takes place
driving and can be acknowledged. exclusively when the vehicle is being driven
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument The Tire Pressure Monitoring begins to “learn” the (vehicle speed above 16 mph (25 km/h)).
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has wheels after a wheel change, wheel transmitter
f Check the tire pressure for all wheels on the
been corrected. replacement or update of the tire settings. During
“Info pressure” display.
this process, the Tire Pressure Monitoring recog-
nizes the tires and their locations. f Correct the tire pressure to the required
The on-board computer displayes the message pressure if necessary.
“TPM is learning, monitoring not act.”.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring requires a certain Changing a wheel and replacing tires
amount of time to learn the wheels. During this
time, the current tire pressures are not available f New wheels must be fitted with radio transmit-
on the on-board-computer: ters for the Tire Pressure Monitoring.
Before tires are changed, the battery charge
– The tire pressure warning light remains lit until state of the wheel transmitters should be
all wheels have been learned. checked at an authorized Porsche dealer.
– The display of the tire pressure function of the f Switch the ignition off when changing a wheel.
on-board computer shows lines.
The tire settings on the on-board computer must
– The required pressures for cold tires at 68 °F be updated after changing a wheel.
(20 °C) are indicated in the Info pressure If the tire settings are not updated, the message
display in the tire pressure menu. “Wheel change? Input new TPM settings!” is
Position and pressure information is displayed as displayed on the on-board computer.
soon as the Tire Pressure Monitoring has f Update the on-board computer settings when
assigned the wheels identified as belonging to the the vehicle is stationary the next time.
vehicle to the correct wheel positions.

140 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 141 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning light The warning light in the speedometer lights up: No monitoring
– When a loss in pressure has been detected.
In the event of faults the Tire Pressure Monitoring
– When learning newly mounted wheels/wheel cannot monitor the tire pressure.
Warning!
sensors, as long as the vehicle’s own wheels The warning light on the instrument panel flashes
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a Tire have not yet been recognized. for approx. one minute and then remains conti-
Pressure Monitoring (TPM) malfunction indicator nuously illuminated and a corresponding message
In the event of a defect in Tire Pressure Monitoring
when the system is not operating properly. appears on the on-board computer.
or a temporary fault, the warning light in the
The TPM malfunction indicator is combined with a
speedometer flashes for approx. one minute and Monitoring is not active when:
low tire pressure telltale.
then remains continuously illuminated.
When the system detects a malfunction, the – the Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty,
telltale will flash for approx. one minute and then The tire pressure warning light in the instrument
– wheel transmitters for the Tire Pressure
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence panel goes out only when the cause of the fault
Monitoring are missing,
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as has been rectified.
long as the malfunction exists. – during the learning phase after the tire settings
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the Partial monitoring have been updated,
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire – after a wheel change without updating the tire
pressure as intended. Monitoring of the other wheels is continued if there settings,
TPM malfuntions may occur for a variety of is a fault in one or two wheel transmitters.
reasons, including the installation of replacement – more than four wheel transmitters are
– The tire pressure warning light lights up. detected,
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPM from functioning properly. – The message “TPM partial monitoring” is – there is external interference by other radio
Always check the TPM malfunction telltale after displayed on the on-board computer. sources, e.g. wireless headphones,
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
– No tire pressures are displayed on the on- – tire temperatures are too high.
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
board computer for wheels with faulty wheel
nate tires and wheels allow the TPM to continue to
transmitters. f Please see the chapter “WARNINGS ON THE
function properly. INSTRUMENT PANEL AND THE ON-BOARD
COMPUTER” on Page 148.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 141


10_GT3_21.book Seite 142 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

4. Warning stage 2
At speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h):
(from –7 psi (–0.5 bar))
In accordance with physical principles, the air
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
The tire pressure increases or decreases by
around 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) for every 18 °F (10 °C)
change in temperature.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring takes this relation-
ship between tire pressure and temperature into
account.

Tire pressure specifications


Information on tire pressure for public roads can
be found in this Owner's Manual in the Technical
Data chapter or on the tire-pressure plate in the
A- Tire pressure left door aperture.
B- Tire temperature These values apply to cold tires at 68 °F (20 °C)
C- Tire pressures for cold tires ambient temperature.
D- Tire pressure for hot tires
E- Pressure increase as the result of temperature
increase
F - Pressure drop in faulty/leaking tires

Pressure increase as the result of


temperature increase
1. Required-pressure line
2. Warning stage 1
(from –4 to –7 psi (–0.3 bar to –0.5 bar))
3. Warning stage 2
At speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h):
(from –5 psi (–0.4 bar))

142 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 143 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

OIL
Display and measurement of the engine
oil level
Caution!
Risk of engine damage.
f Regularly check the oil level each time before
refueling.
f Do not allow the oil level to fall below the
minimum mark.

Conditions for measuring the oil level


1. Vehicle stationary.
2. It is important to ensure that the vehicle is on
a level surface for correct oil level measure-
ment to occur. Initiating oil level measurement 4. Allow waiting time to elapse.
3. Engine must be at operating temperature 1. Push operating lever forward in order to switch 5. Once the measurement has been completed,
(at least 140 °F/60 °C oil temperature). on the selection field. you can read off the engine oil level on the
segment display.
4. Engine must be idling. 2. Select “OIL” with the operating lever.
3. Push operating lever forward. Measurement is
started.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 143


10_GT3_21.book Seite 144 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f Add engine oil if necessary.


Switch off ignition before adding engine oil.
f Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
on Page 160.
f Never add more engine oil than required
to reach the maximum mark.

Failure
A failure of the oil level display is indicated by a
warning message on the on-board computer.

Display “Check oil level”


The on-board computer display “Check oil level” is
an additional reminder to you to check the oil level.
The display depends on the distance travelledand
the operating conditions, and does not indicate
6. If the segments are filled in up to the top line, 7. If only the bottom segment is filled in, the oil whether or not the oil level is correct.
the oil level has reached the maximum mark. level has reached the minimum mark.

Under no circumstances add engine oil. Add engine oil immediately.


8. If the bottom segment flashes, the oil level has
dropped to below the minimum mark.

Add engine oil immediately.


The difference between the minimum and
maximum marks on the segment display is
approx. 1.1 quarts (1.0 liters).
One segment of the display between the minimum
and maximum marks corresponds to a top-up
quantity of approx. 0.32 quarts (0.3 liter).

144 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 145 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

SET
Basic setting on on-board computer
Switching on selection field “D”
f Push operating lever forward.

Changing the basic setting of the on-board


computer
f Select “SET” with the operating lever.

f Push operating lever forward. Reset


f Select the desired function with the operating – Reset all,
lever: Reset average consumption,
Reset average speed,
Reset trip counter

Units
– Speedometer: km - km/h, miles - mph
– Consumption:
l/100 km, mls/gal (USA), mpg (UK), km/l
– Temperature: °Celsius, °Fahrenheit
– Tire pressure: bar, psi

Instruments, On-Board Computer 145


10_GT3_21.book Seite 146 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Display
(Select central line of the on-board
computer)
– Change display
Audio information (set radio station)
Range on remaining fuel
Empty
– Telephone Info
When Telephone information is active,
incoming telephone calls are displayed on the
on-board computer.

Navigation 12/24h mode


– Integrated in the BC Select time mode:
(Navigation instructions can be recalled on the
– 12h (small squares on the right side of the time
on-board computer display)
display for AM/PM),
– When turning off
– 24h
(Navigation instructions are only shown before
changing direction) Light
Basic setting USA only:
Switch daytime running lights on and off.
– Restore the basic setting of the on-board
computer Daytime running lights
(daytime running lights switched off)
Language
– Select language version Daytime running lights
(daytime running lights switched on)

146 Instruments, On-Board Computer


10_GT3_21.book Seite 147 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

General information regarding the Average consumption and average speed


on-board computer functions The values displayed are based on the distance
travelled since the last reset to “zero”.
Range on remaining fuel
You can set the starting time for a measurement
The range on remaining fuel is continuously recal-
before or during the trip.
culated during the journey based on the fuel level,
Switching the ignition off does not reset the
current consumption and average consumption.
measurements. It is therefore possible to collect
The more the fuel level falls, the more spontan-
values over long periods.
eously the display reacts. For this reason, the
Disconnecting the car battery will cause these
range on remaining fuel is not displayed if less
memories to be erased.
than 9 miles (15 kilometers).
If the vehicle's inclination changes while driving or Tire pressure
refueling, incorrect range information may The Tire pressure function of the on-board
temporarily be given. computer displays the tire pressures dependent
on temperature in the four wheels. You can watch
Note
the tire pressure rise and fall while driving.
If the tank is nearly empty and you top up with only The display is only for information.
a small quantity of fuel, an accurate range on
f To correct the tire pressures, always use the
remaining fuel is impossible.
displayed values from the “Info pressure”
display in the tire pressure menu.

Instruments, On-Board Computer 147


10_GT3_21.book Seite 148 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warnings on the instrument panel and the on-board computer


If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding chapters in the Owner’s Manual.
Warning messages are issued only if all measurement preconditions are met. Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly –
in particular, always check the engine oil level before refuelling.

Acknowledging warning messages


Warning messages can be deleted from the on-board computer display.
f Push the on-board computer operating lever forward.
You can recall erased warning messages in the “INFO” menu.

Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure


panel computer computer
Seat belt Driver and passenger must fasten their seat belts.

Handbrake Handbrake is still on.

Ignition key
not removed
Replace battery Replace the remote-control battery.
in ignition key
Ignition lock faulty, Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
visit workshop
Ignition lock faulty, Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
visit workshop now
Relieve steering Relieve the steering lock by moving the steering wheel to the left or right.
Steering locked The steering wheel lock remains engaged.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

148 Warnings
10_GT3_21.book Seite 149 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure


panel computer computer
Lights on Low beam/side marker lamps on

Parking light on Left/right parking light on

Check left/right dipped beam (low The reported light is faulty. Check bulb.
beam) Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

also applies to:


high beam, side indicator light,
reversing light
Daytime Daytime running lights switch off when the engine is shut off. Switch on lights if necessary.
driving lights off
Dynamic Dynamic cornering light faulty.
cornering light Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
failure
Headlight beam Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
adjustment faulty
Front lid not closed Close luggage compartment lid properly.

Rear lid not closed Close engine compartment lid properly.

Rain sensor faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Refill washer fluid

LIMIT The current speed can only be accepted for the acoustic warning signal when the vehicle is in motion.
Cannot be accepted
with vehicle stopped
LIMIT Selected speed limit (e.g. 30 mph) for the acoustic warning signal has been exceeded.
30 Adjust your speed if necessary.

Warnings 149
10_GT3_21.book Seite 150 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure


panel computer computer
Fuel gauge warning Consider remaining range Refuel at next opportunity.
light

Check engine oil level Start engine oil level measurement in the on-board computer.

Engine oil pressure too low Stop immediately at a suitable place, measure oil level with the on-board computer and, if necessary,
add engine oil.

Warning light Engine temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool.
Temperature gauge Check coolant level and, if necessary, add coolant.

Temperature gauge Check coolant level Switch engine off and let it cool.
warning light flashes Check coolant level and, if necessary, add coolant.

Check engine Stop immediately at a suitable place and check tank cap for proper fastening. If the tank cap was
visit workshop fastened correctly, consult your authorized Porsche dealer.

Reduced engine power Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.

Temperature gauge Failure of Consult your authorized Porsche dealer.


warning light flashes engine compartment blower

Warning Battery/generator Stop at a safe place and switch the engine off. Do not continue driving.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.


oil pressure
indicator
Failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
oil level
indicator
Oil temperature Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
indicator faulty

150 Warnings
10_GT3_21.book Seite 151 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure


panel computer computer
Failure indicator Coolant indicator failed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Failure Outside temperature indicator failed.


outside temp. Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.
indicator
Service Have the brake pads changed immediately at an authorized Porsche dealer.
wear on
brake pads

Warning Stop immediately in a suitable place.


Brake fluid level Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Warning Stop immediately in a suitable place.


Brake distribution Do not continue driving. Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

ABS failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

SC off Stability Control (SC) switched off.


Continuous display: SC off

SC+TC off Stability Control (SC) and Traction Control (TC) switched off.
Continuous display: SC+TC off

SC+TC on Stability Control (SC) and Traction Control (TC) switched on.

PSM failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Warnings 151
10_GT3_21.book Seite 152 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure


panel computer computer
PASM Normal/Sport Indicator for selected PASM mode

PASM failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

PASM indicator faulty Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

PADM failure Dynamic engine mounting failed.


Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

System fault airbag Airbag is faulty.


Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Check passenger’s seat setting Weight sensing is impaired on the passenger's seat (Advanced Airbag).
Correct the seating position, set the backrest upright, do not support weight on the armrests, or lift on
the handles.
Depress clutch pedal Depress clutch pedal when starting.

System fault Several systems may have failed. Adjust your driving style. Reduce speed.
visit workshop Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Failure Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.


fuel level indicator
workshop
Service in mls/days (km/days) Service indicator
Bring the vehicle in for service no later than after the distance/time shown has elapsed.
Please see the additional information in the “Maintenance” booklet.
Service now Service indicator
Have your vehicle serviced at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Flat tyre! Tire Pressure Monitoring has detected a serious pressure loss.
Stop at a suitable place and check tires for damage. Fill in tire sealant if necessary.

152 Warnings
10_GT3_21.book Seite 153 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Instrument On-board Text display on on-board Meaning/measure


panel computer computer
Add air The Tire Pressure Monitoring has detected a gradual pressure loss. Correct tire pressure at the next
opportunity.

TPM is learning The Tire Pressure Monitoring is learning the wheels on the vehicle. The Tire Pressure Monitoring is
monitoring searching for the tires and their position. During this period the current pressure specifications are not
not act. available on the on-board computer.
TPM inactive The Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.

TPM partial monitoring 1 or 2 wheel transmitters are faulty. The tire pressures of these wheels are not monitored. The other
wheels are still monitored.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
TPM inactive The Tire Pressure Monitoring is temporarily deactivated by excessive tire temperatures (approx. 248 °F
Brief disturbance (120 °C)) or external interference (e.g. from other wheel transmitters inside the car). Once the source
of the interference is removed, the system is automatically reactivated.
TPM inactive
Too many wheel transmitters
Wheel change? Update the settings in the TPM menu of the on-board computer at the next opportunity. Wrong entries
Input new TPM will affect the correct pressure information in the menu. The safety of your vehicle is at risk.
settings!
TPM The display of the Tire Pressure Monitoring is faulty.
Indicator failure Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.

LIFT not lowered May occur briefly through system-related reasons. Drive cautiously at an appropriate speed.
If the message continues to be shown at high speed, drive at a suitable speed to the next authorized
Porsche dealer.
LIFT failure Front axle lift system failed.
Have the fault remedied at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Warnings 153
10_GT3_21.book Seite 154 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Shifting Gears
Manual Transmission, Clutch........................ 155
Upshift indicator .........................................155

154 Shifting Gears


10_GT3_21.book Seite 155 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

To avoid damage to the clutch and transmis- Permitted engine speed


sion:
f You should change into a higher gear before
f Always depress the clutch pedal fully when
the needle reaches the red mark on the tacho-
changing gears. Make sure that the gearshift
meter, or ease off the accelerator.
lever is completely engaged.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
f Only shift into reverse when the car has come
feed is interrupted.
to a complete stop.
Caution!
f When shifting gears, always ensure that the
clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when
has fully engaged. shifting down to a lower gear.
f Select reverse only when vehicle is stationary. f Take care not to exceed the maximum
permitted engine speed when shifting down.
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward
and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power Upshift indicator
and engine braking.
In addition to the red zone on the tachometer
Manual Transmission, Clutch When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is scale, the upshift arrow also prompts you to
The positions of the gears are shown on the shift on, the backup lights are illuminated. initiate the gear shift in good time.
diagram on the gearshift lever.

Warning!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
or other objects.
Nonskid floor mats of the correct size are
available at your authorized Porsche dealer.

Shifting Gears 155


10_GT3_21.book Seite 156 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Maintenance, Car Care


Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ........................................... 157
Coolant Level .............................................158
Engine Oil................................................... 159
Engine Oil Level .......................................... 160
Brake Fluid Level ........................................ 162
Fuel Economy.............................................164
Operating your Porsche in other Countries.... 164
Fuel ........................................................... 165
Fuel Recommendations ............................... 166
Portable Fuel Containers ............................. 167
Fuel Evaporation Control ............................. 167
Emission Control System............................. 168
How Emission Control Works ....................... 169
Washer Fluid............................................... 170
Power Steering........................................... 171
Air Filter ..................................................... 172
Combination Filter....................................... 172
Manual Transmission Oil .............................. 172
Wiper Blades .............................................. 173
Car Care Instructions .................................. 174

156 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 157 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Exercise Extreme Caution when f In particular, be very careful to ensure that f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), the battery or fuel.
Working on your Vehicle jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get Keep a fire extinguisher close at hand.
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
Danger! f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
belts or other moving parts.
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
Ignoring the following instructions may The radiator and radiator fans are in the front
about any servicing, have it done by your
cause serious personal injury or death. of the car.
authorized Porsche dealer.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle on the engine-compartment lid.
Improper maintenance during the warranty
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not period may affect your Porsche warranty
The engine-compartment blower can start or
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do coverage.
continue running as a function of temperature,
not attempt the adjustments described on the even with the engine switched off. f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
following pages. Carry out work in these areas only with the coolant, are hazardous to your health.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle. engine off, the ignition switched off, and Keep these fluids out of children’s reach and
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well exercise extreme caution. dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
priate regulations.
ventilated area. f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the ignition system. When the ignition is on, high f Some countries require additional tools and
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel voltage is present in all wires connected with special spare parts to be carried in your
fumes might be present. Be especially the ignition system; therefore, exercise vehicle.
cautious of such devices such as hot water extreme caution when working on any part of Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
heaters which ignite a flame intermittently. the engine while the ignition is on or the engine
is running.
f Before working on any part in the engine Power measurements
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool f Always support your car with safety stands if it
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment is necessary to work under the car. Power measurements on dynamometers are not
components can burn skin on contact. f When working under the car without safety approved by Porsche.
f Be alert and cautious around engine at all stands but with the wheels on the ground,
times while the engine is running. make sure the car is on level ground, the
If work has to be performed with the engine wheels are blocked, and that the engine
running, always set the parking brake, and cannot be started.
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position. Remove the ignition key.

Maintenance, Car Care 157


10_GT3_21.book Seite 158 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Checking coolant level 1. Switch engine off and let it cool.


Please see the chapter “COOLING SYSTEM” on
The expansion tank with its filler orifice is in the Page 112.
left-hand side of the engine compartment.
2. Cover the expansion tank cap with a thick rag.
f Check the coolant level regularly through the Open cap slowly and carefully and allow
transparent expansion tank. overpressure to escape.
Then unscrew cap completely.
When the engine is cold and the car is level the
fluid level must lie between the “MIN” and “MAX” 3. Only add a mixture of antifreeze and water in
markings. equal parts, and do not exceed the “MAX”
mark.
Topping off coolant
Antifreeze in coolant:
Warning! 50% gives protection down to –31 °F/–35 °C
60% gives protection down to –58 °F/–50 °C
Danger of serious personal injury or death
from scalding. Coolant is hazardous to your 4. Screw cap firmly on.
health, and may be fatal if swallowed. If in an emergency pure water has been added, the
Coolant Level f Do not open the cap of the expansion tank mix ratio must be corrected at an authorized
while the engine is hot. Porsche dealer.
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE” f Allow the engine to cool down before opening Marked loss of coolant indicates leakage in the
on Page 157. the cap and protect your hands, arms and face cooling system.
from any possible escape of hot coolant. The cause should immediately be remedied at an
The cooling system is filled at the factory with a authorized Porsche dealer.
permanent coolant. f Keep coolant out of children’s reach.
It provides year-round protection from corrosion
f Also, keep coolant away from your pets.
and freezing down to –31 °F/–35 °C.
They can be attracted to it should there be a
f Only use antifreeze authorized by Porsche. spill, or to used coolant left in an open
container. Coolant can be deadly to pets if
consumed.

158 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 159 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Engine-compartment blower, radiator fan Engine Oil If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed,
climatic conditions are warm, and the load is high,
The radiator and radiator fan are in the front of the It is important to perform oil changes regularly in the oil should be checked more frequently, as
car. accordance with the intervals specified in the driving conditions will determine the rate of oil
The engine-compartment blower is mounted on “Maintenance” booklet. consumption.
the engine compartment lid.
– The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to
Engine oil consumption lubricate and cool all of its moving parts.
Warning!
Therefore, the engine oil should be checked
It is normal for your engine to consume oil. regularly and kept at the required level.
Risk of injury.
The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality
After the engine is switched off, the engine-
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine – Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
compartment temperature is monitored for
is operated, the climate, road conditions as well checked at every refueling.
approx. 30 minutes.
as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the – The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level
During this period, and depending on tempe-
lubricant. indicator.
rature, the engine-compartment blower may
continue to run or start to run. If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and The oil pressure warning light indicates serious
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil engine damage may be occuring when lit, if
f Carry out work in these areas only with the
measurement may not show any drop in the oil engine rpm is above idle speed.
engine off, the ignition off, and exercise
level at all, even after 600 miles (1,000 km) or
extreme caution.
more. This is because the oil is gradually
Risk of injury. The radiator fan in the front becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
end of the car may be operating or unexpec- appear that the oil level has not changed.
tedly start operating when the engine is The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the
switched on. vehicle is driven at high speeds, as on an
expressway, making it then appear that oil is
f Carry out work in these areas only with the
excessively consumed after driving at high
engine switched off.
speeds.
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are
dusty, humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil
change intervals should be greater.

Maintenance, Car Care 159


10_GT3_21.book Seite 160 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Engine Oil Level Topping off engine oil Always observe the following points:
– Use engine oils approved by Porsche only.
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME Porsche recommends .
This is a precondition for optimum and
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
The right oil for your vehicle problem-free operation of your vehicle.
on Page 157.
– Regular oil changes are part of servicing.
f Regularly check the oil level using the on-board Vehicle Complies Viscosity
computer after the vehicle is refueled. with class2) It is important that the service intervals,
Please see the chapter “OIL DISPLAY AND approval1) particularly the oil change intervals, are
observed in accordance with the specifications
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL” 911 GT3: Porsche A40 SAE 0W - 403)
in the “Maintenance” booklet.
on Page 143. SAE 5W - 404)
SAE 5W - 504) – Oils approved by Porsche can be mixed with
The difference between the minimum and
each other.
maximum marks on the segment display is 1) Generally,you can find details on the
approx. 1.1 quarts (1.0 liters). manufacturer approvals on the oil containers or as – Porsche engines are designed so that no oil
Each segment of the display corresponds to a notice displayed by the retailer. additives may be used.
approx. 0.32 quart (0.3 liter). The current approval status is also available from – A label is located in the engine compartment,
your authorized Porsche dealer. which provides you with information on suitable
2)
SAE viscosity class – Example: SAE 0W - 40 oil for your engine.
Specification 0W = Viscosity specification for low Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
temperatures (winter). advise you.
Specification 40 = Viscosity specification for high
temperatures.
3)
For all temperature ranges.
4) For the temperature range above –25 °C.

160 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 161 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning! 4. Add at most 0.5 quarts (0.5 liter) of engine oil


at a time.
Risk of burning from hot parts in engine
Never add more engine oil than required
compartment. Risk of injury by rotating
to reach the max. mark.
parts. The engine compartment blower on
the engine compartment lid can start up 5. Carefully close cap of the oil filler opening.
even with engine off.
6. Measure oil level again with the on-board
f Exercise extrem caution when working in the computer. Switch off the engine.
engine compartment.
7. If necessary, repeat the process and add more
f Top off engine oil only with the engine off. engine oil as required.
Engine oil is hazardous to your health and
may be fatal if swallowed.
f Keep engine oil out of children’s reach.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals.
f Always protect your skin by washing
1. Measure the oil level and read off the required
thoroughly with soap and water.
top-up quantity on the on-board computer.

Note 2. Switch off the engine.

The Check Engine warning light may light up if the 3. Unscrew cap of the oil filler opening.
cap of the oil filler opening is opened while the
engine is running.

Maintenance, Car Care 161


10_GT3_21.book Seite 162 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Brake Fluid Level


f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on Page 157.
f Use only new (unused) Original Porsche
brake fluid.

Warning!
Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and
may cause death if swallowed.
Brake fluid also attacks paintwork.
f Keep brake fluid out of children’s reach.
f Take care while topping off brake fluid not to
soil the luggage compartment or items of
luggage.
Checking the brake fluid level A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and
automatic readjustment of the disc brakes is
The reservoir for the hydraulic braking and clutch normal.
systems is located in the luggage compartment. If, however, the fluid level falls markedly or below
the minimum mark, the braking system may have
1. Open and remove cover flap A. developed a leak.
2. Regularly check the brake-fluid level on the f Have the brake system checked without delay
transparent expansion tank through the at an authorized Porsche dealer.
window B.
The fluid level should always lie between the
minimum and maximum marks.

162 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 163 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Changing the brake fluid Warning light USA


Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
time. This accumulation of water lowers the Warning light Canada
boiling point and, under certain operating condi-
tions, can affect the braking performance. – The warning lights on the instrument panel and
Therefore have the brake fluid changed in accor- on the on-board computer indicate an insuffi-
dance with the change intervals stated in the cient brake fluid level.
brochure “Maintenance”.
– If the warning light lights up on the instrument
panel and the warning message appears on
the on-board computer in combination with a
larger pedal travel, a brake circuit may have
failed.

If the warning lights should light up when


driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
f Do not continue driving.
Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.

Maintenance, Car Care 163


10_GT3_21.book Seite 164 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Fuel Economy f Any additional weight carried in the vehicle Operating your Porsche in other
reduces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to a
Fuel economy will vary depending on where, minimum and remove all unnecessary items.
Countries
when and how you drive, optional equipment
f Organize your trips to take in several errands Government regulations in the United States and
installed, and the general condition of your Canada require that automobiles meet specific
in one trip.
car. emission regulations and safety standards. There-
A car tuned to specifications and correctly f All electrical accessories contribute to incre- fore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ from
maintained, will help you to achieve optimal ased fuel consumption. vehicles sold in other countries.
fuel economy.
f Only switch on the air conditioning when neces- If you plan to take your Porsche outside the conti-
f Have your vehicle tuned to specifications. sary. nental limits of the United States or Canada, there
Air cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper is the possibility that
The EPA estimated miles per gallon (mpg) is
engine “breathing”.
to be used for comparison purposes, actual – unleaded fuel may not be available;
Battery should be fully charged.
mileage may be different from the estimated
Wheels should be properly aligned. – unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
mpg, depending on your driving speed,
Tires should be inflated at correct pressure. octane rating. Excessive engine knock and
weather conditions and trip length. Your
f Always monitor your fuel consumption. actual highway mileage will probably be less serious damage to both engine and catalytic
than the estimated mpg. converters could result;
f Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
as much as possible. f Please observe all local and national speed – service may be inadequate due to lack of
limits. proper service facilities, tools or diagnostic
f Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops. equipment;
f Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower – replacement parts may not be available or very
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without difficult to get.
lugging the engine will help save fuel.
Porsche cannot be responsible for the
f Prolonged “warm up” idling wastes gas. Start mechanical damage that could result
the vehicle just before you are ready to drive. because of inadequate fuel, service or parts
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. availability.
f Switch off the engine if stationary for longer If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
periods. bring it back home, be sure to find out about
shipping and forwarding requirements, as well as
current import and customs regulations.

164 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 165 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Fuel
Warning!
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling fuel.
f Avoid contact with skin or clothing.
f Do not inhale fuel vapors.
To prevent damage to the emission control
system and engine:
f Never drive the tank completely out of fuel.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
– refueling with engine running. If there is a defect in the automatic unlocking
f Please see the chapter “FUEL ECONOMY” on system:
Page 164.
Opening the filler flap f Open the passenger door.
Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM” on Page 168. f Pull the ring in the right-hand door aperture
The filler opening is under the filler flap in the front
Please see the chapter “LEVEL GAUGE” on (arrow).
right fender.
Page 113.
f With the vehicle unlocked, press on the front
Check engine warning light part of the filler flap (arrow) to open the flap.
The filler flap is centrally locked along with the
If the warning lights in the instrument panel and on- other locks.
board computer come on and remain on while
driving, it suggests:
– a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
– an improperly fastened tank cap or

Maintenance, Car Care 165


10_GT3_21.book Seite 166 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

1. Important: Stop the engine and switch off the Fuel Recommendations
ignition.
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic conver-
2. Slowly unscrew the tank cap.
ters and must use UNLEADED FUEL ONLY.
Hang the tank cap's plastic strap on the hook
on the inside wall of the filler flap. Your engine is designed to provide optimum
performance and fuel economy using unleaded
3. Insert fuel-hose nozzle fully into the filler neck
premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON
with the handle of the fuel-hose nozzle facing
(93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore recom-
down.
mends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
4. Do not add further fuel once the correctly
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not
operated automatic fuel-hose nozzle has
always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
switched off.
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels
Fuel could spray or could run over in warm
with octane numbers of at least 95 RON
temperatures.
(90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s “Electronic
5. Replace the tank cap immediately after Octane™ knock control” will adapt the ignition
refueling and turn it until you hear it and feel it timing, if necessary.
engage.
It is important to observe the regular service inter-
Refueling vals, and particularly the oil change intervals,
If you lose the tank cap, you must replace it
only with an original part to reduce the possi- specified in the “Maintenance” booklet.
Fuel tank capacity is listed under “Capacities”.
bility of a fire in the event of a collision.
f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on The use of UNLEADED FUEL ONLY is critically
Page 239. important to the life of the catalytic conver-
Caution! ters. Deposits from leaded fuels will ruin the
Porsche does not recommend the use of fuel
Risk of damage. Body decals may bleach if converters and make it ineffective as an
additives.
they come into contact with fuel. emission control device.
Fuel is highly flammable and harmful to f Clean up any spilt fuel immediately. Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel
health. tank opening, and gas station pumps have smaller
nozzles. This will prevent accidental pumping of
leaded fuel into cars with catalytic converters.

166 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 167 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the Fuels containing ethanol Fuel Evaporation Control
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we
recommend you do not take your car to areas or Do not use any fuels containing more than 10
countries where unleaded fuel may not be percent ethanol by volume. Fuel tank venting
available.
We recommend, however, to change to a different The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister
fuel or station if any of the following problems prevent fuel from escaping to the atmosphere at
Octane ratings occur with your vehicle: extreme high outside temperatures, when driving
abruptly around curves and when the car is parked
Octane rating indicates a fuel’s ability to resist – Deterioration of driveability and performance.
at an incline or in any other nonlevel position.
detonation. Therefore, buying the correct octane – Substantially reduced fuel economy.
gas is important to prevent engine “damage”.
– Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially Vapor control system and storage
The RON octane rating is based on the research at high altitude or at high temperature.
method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
octane rating) or AKI (antiknock index) octane – Engine malfunction or stalling. the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
rating usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is vapors to the carbon canister where they are
calculated as research octane number plus motor
Portable Fuel Containers stored as long as the engine does not run.
octane number, divided by 2, that is written as:
Danger!
Purge system
RON+MON or R+M Portable fuel containers, full or partially
2 2 empty, may leak causing an explosion, or When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from
result in fire in case of an accident. the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be
The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than f Never carry additional fuel in portable contai-
the RON rating: directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent
ners in your vehicle.
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI normal combustion.

Maintenance, Car Care 167


10_GT3_21.book Seite 168 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Emission Control System To assure efficient operation of the Emission Parking


Control System:

In the interest of clean air f Have your vehicle maintained properly and in Warning!
accordance with the recommendations Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
Pollution of our environment has become a described in your Maintenance Booklet. injury or death.
problem that is of increasing concern to all of us. Lack of proper maintenance, as well as
We urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air improper use of the vehicle, will impair the f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
in controlling the pollutants emitted from the function of the emission control system and where the hot exhaust system may come in
automobile. could lead to damage. contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
other flammable material.
Porsche has developed an emission control f Do not alter or remove any component of the
system that controls or reduces those parts of the emission control system. f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
emission that can be harmful to our environment. the fire department.
f Do not alter or remove any device, such as Do not endanger your life by attempting to put
Your Porsche is equipped with such a system.
heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves, out the fire.
Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in etc., which are designed to protect your
your new car under the terms and conditions set vehicle’s emission control system.
forth in the Warranty Booklet. In addition to serious engine damage, this can Undercoating
result in a fire if excess raw fuel reaches the
You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the
exhaust system. Danger!
responsibility to provide regular maintenance
service for the vehicle and to keep a record of all f Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
maintenance work performed. To facilitate record detect engine misfire or other unusual opera- injury or death.
keeping, have the service performed by autho- ting conditions.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
rized Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold,
technicians and special tools to provide fast and
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
efficient service.
shields. During driving the substance used for
undercoating could overheat and ignite.

168 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 169 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

How Emission Control Works Oxygen sensor The catalytic converters will be damaged by:
– push or tow starting the vehicle
When an automobile engine is running, it uses The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe
energy generated through the combustion of a continuously senses the oxygen content of the – misfiring of the engine
mixture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a exhaust and signals the information to an
– turning off the ignition while the vehicle is
car is driven fast or slowly or whether the engine electronic control unit. The control unit corrects
moving or
is cold or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) the air/fuel ratio, so the engine always receives an
may not be burned completely, but may be accurately metered air/fuel mixture. – driving until the fuel tank is completely empty
discharged into the engine crankcase or exhaust
– by other unusual operating conditions.
system. Additonal hydrocarbons may enter the Crankcase ventilation
atmosphere through evaporation of fuel from the f Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
fuel tank. These hydrocarbons (HC), when Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable these conditions, since raw fuel might reach
released into the air, contribute to undesirable emissions from the engine crankcase are not the catalytic converters. This could result in
pollution. permitted to reach the outside atmosphere. These overheating of the converters. Federal law
emissions are recirculated from the crankcase to prohibits use of leaded fuel in this car.
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions. the air intake system. From here the emissions
They, too, are formed during the combustion mix with the intake air and are later burned in the
process and discharged into the exhaust system. engine.

To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is


Catalytic converters
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up”
under all operating conditions. devices built into the exhaust system of the
vehicle. The catalytic converters burn the undesi-
rable pollutants in the exhaust gas before it is
released into the atmosphere.

The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is criti-


cally important for the life of the catalytic
converters. Therefore, only unleaded fuel
must be used.

Maintenance, Car Care 169


10_GT3_21.book Seite 170 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Clean water is generally not enough to clean the Topping off washer fluid
windshield and headlights. Depending on the
1. Please note all the information on the refill
season, mix the water with the appropriate
container of the cleaning agent.
additives. Follow the instructions for the mixture
ratio. 2. Open cap of the washer-fluid reservoir (arrow).
Only use window cleaner concentrate which meets 3. Top off washer fluid and close cap properly.
the following requirements.
f Do not use engine coolant anti-freeze or any
– Dilutability 1:100 other solution that can damage the car’s paint,
in the washer reservoir.
– Phosphate-free
– Suitable for plastic headlight lenses. Warning light
We recommend window cleaner concentrates If less than 0.53 quarts (0.5 liter) remains, a
approved by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche warning message appears on the on-board
dealer will be pleased to advise you. computer.
Summer filling f Add washer fluid.

Washer Fluid Water + window cleaner concentrate at the mixing


ratio indicated on the container.

Capacity Winter filling


f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on Water + antifreeze protection + window cleaner
Page 239. concentrate at the mixing ratio indicated on the
container.
Washer fluid f Please note all the information on the contai-
ners of the window cleaner concentrate or the
The reservoir is denoted by the blue screw cap antifreeze protection.
and is located in the luggage compartment in the
rear left.

170 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 171 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Warning! Checking hydraulic fluid


Risk of accident resulting in serious personal
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
injury or death.
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
When the engine is stopped (e.g. when being
on Page 157.
towed) or the hydraulic system fails, there is
no assistance for steering. f Only use hydraulic fluid authorized by Porsche.
Therefore, substantially more force will have Specification:
to be exerted in order to steer. Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 239.
f Exercise great care when being towed.
Check the fluid level with the engine stopped and
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest autho-
cold (approximately 68 °F/20 °C).
rized Porsche dealer.
1. Start the engine and let it idle for approx.
20 seconds.
Switch off the engine.
2. Open the engine compartment lid.
3. Open the reservoir cap.
Power Steering
4. Wipe measuring rod.
Power steering is assisted by hydraulic auxiliary Close cap and reopen. The fluid level should lie
forces. in the area of the “COLD” marking.
The hydraulic fluid reservoir is located in the Add hydraulic fluid if necessary.
engine compartment.
5. Close cap carefully.
Note Close engine compartment lid.
The flow noise heard at full steering lock is design- Noticeable loss of fluid indicates leakage in the
related and does not indicate a defect in the system.
steering system. The cause should be remedied immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.

Maintenance, Car Care 171


10_GT3_21.book Seite 172 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Air Filter Manual Transmission Oil


A dirty air filter not only reduces engine perfor- The transmission oil has to be checked and
mance, but can lead to premature engine wear. changed at the intervals listed in your Maintenance
Schedule.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service. f Please see the chapter “CAPACITIES” on
Page 239.
f In dusty conditions, check the filter element
more frequently and replace if necessary. We recommend that you have the transmission oil
changed at your authorized Porsche dealer, who
Combination Filter has the required lubricants and the necessary
filling equipment.
The fresh air passing through the combination
filter into the passenger compartment is virtually f If you suspect an oil leak in the transmission,
free of dust, pollen, and unpleasant odors. have your authorized Porsche dealer check it
out immediately.
f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes,
press the recirculating-air button.
A dirty filter can be the cause of reduced air flow:
f Have filter replaced by your authorized
Porsche dealer.
Regular filter replacement is part of the routine
maintenance service.

172 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 173 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Wiper Blades If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a Changing windshield wiper blades
result of the following:
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital f Please follow the separate instructions for
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
for a clear view. fitting wiper blades as supplied by the
wash, wax residues may adhere to the winds-
manufacturer.
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year hield. These wax residues can be removed
(before and after the cold season) or whenever only by using window cleaner concentrate. f We recommend that you get your authorized
wiper performance deteriorates. Porsche dealer to replace the wiper blades.
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
Caution! f Replace damaged or worn wiper blades as Caution!
soon as possible.
Risk of damage if the wiper arm accidentally Risk of damage.
falls back on to the window. f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on If a wiper blade is not changed properly, it
Page 170. can come loose when the car is moving.
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when repla-
cing the wiper blade. f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer f Check whether the wiper blade is seated
for further information. securely.
Risk of damage if wiper blades that are
The wiper blade must engage the wiper arm
frozen in place are loosened improperly.
properly.
f Thaw the wiper blades before loosening them.

Maintenance note
f Periodically clean the wiper blades with
window cleaner, especially after the vehicle
has been washed in a car wash.
We recommend the Porsche window cleaner. If
they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
the windows can be cleaned with a sponge or
cloth.

Maintenance, Car Care 173


10_GT3_21.book Seite 174 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Car Care Instructions Warning! High-pressure cleaning equipment, steam


Risk of serious personal injury or damage to cleaners
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
the vehicle or property.
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE” Warning!
Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your
on Page 157.
health. High-pressure cleaning equipment or steam
Regular and correct care helps to maintain Most chemical cleaners are concentrates cleaners can damage the following compon-
the value of your car and is also a precondi- which require dilution. High concentrations ents:
tion for the New Vehicle Warranty and the might cause problems ranging from irritation
to serious injury as well as damage to your – tires,
Anti Corrosion Warranty.
vehicle. – logos, emblems,
Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially f Keep cleaning agents out of reach from – painted surfaces,
developed car-care products from the children.
Porsche program available either singly or – alternator.
f Observe all caution labels.
as complete car-care sets. They will be f Please observe the operating instructions from
pleased to help you select suitable products. f Always read directions on the container before the unit manufacturer.
using any product. These directions may
Whether you use Porsche products or other
contain information necessary to avoid f When cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or the like,
commercially available cleaning agents first maintain a minimum distance of 20 inches
personal injury.
make sure of their correct application. (50 cm).
f Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new f Never use high-pressure cleaning equipment
remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the or steam cleaners with a round-jet nozzle. A
may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
owner is willing to give the car. high-pressure cleaning equipment or steam
ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
cleaners with round nozzle will damage your
vented area.
vehicle.
f Do not clean the underside of chassis,
fenders, wheel covers, etc., without protecting f The tires are particularly susceptible to
your hands and arms as you may cut yourself damage.
on sharp-edged metal parts. f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of
the aforementioned components.
Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect
braking efficiency.
f Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.

174 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 175 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Decals Dark colors are also more susceptible to Automatic car washes
scratching because of the composition of their
f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES” on
Caution! pigments and require particularly careful paint
Page 173.
care.
Risk of damage due to separation of the Optional add-on parts or parts which project
decal films when using high-pressure f Do not wash your car in bright sunlight or while
beyond the contours of the vehicle may be
cleaning equipment or steam cleaners. the bodywork is still hot.
damaged by design features (e.g. brushes) of
f Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment f When washing by hand, use abundant water, a automatic car washes.
or steam cleaners to clean decal films. soft sponge or wash brush, and Porsche car
shampoo. The following parts are particularly
susceptible to damage:
f Begin by spraying the body thoroughly with
Washing – Windshield wipers (always switch them off to
water to rinse away loose dirt.
prevent them wiping unintentionally in intermit-
The best method of protecting your car from the f After washing, rinse the car with plenty of tent or sensor operation)
damaging effects of the environment is frequent water and then dry with a chamois leather.
washing and the application of a preservative. The Do not use the same chamois leather for – External antennas (always unscrew)
underside of your vehicle should also be drying as you use for cleaning the windshield – Rear spoiler
thoroughly washed for cinders, salt or sanding at and windows.
winter’s end. – Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire
Warning! height, the greater the risk of damage)
The longer salt, road dust and industrial dust,
dead insects, bird droppings or substances from Moisture which gets on to the brakes during – High-gloss wheels (to prevent these from
trees (resin, pollen) are allowed to remain on the a car wash can reduce braking efficiency or getting scratched, do not clean with the wheel-
bodywork, the more serious is their harmful make the brakes pull unevenly which could cleaning brushes of the car wash).
effect. increase the danger of an accident, causing f Please consult the operator before using
New cars should be washed carefully with plenty serious personal injuries or death. automatic car washes.
of clear water to protect the new paint work. Dark f After washing the car, test the brakes and f Wash and dry by hand all points not reached by
paint finishes show up the smallest of surface steering and briefly brake the discs dry. a car wash, such as door and lid seams or
damage (e.g., scratches) more readily than lighter When doing this, take care not to hamper other door sills.
colors. road users behind you (traffic conditions
permitting).

Maintenance, Car Care 175


10_GT3_21.book Seite 176 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Note f Do not treat matt-painted components with Minor paint damage


preservatives or polishes as this will spoil the
Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles f Have minor paint damage, such as scratches,
matte effect.
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal scores or chips caused by flying stones,
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its repaired immediately by your authorized
Preservation
way into the passengers compartment during or Porsche dealer before corrosion sets in.
shortly after the car wash. The paint surface becomes dull over time due to
weathering. It is therefore necessary to preserve However, if there are already traces of corrosion,
the paint regularly. they must first be removed carefully and
Door lock thoroughly. Coat the area with a rust-proofing
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is
primer and finish off with a top coat. The paint
f To prevent the door lock from freezing during prevented from adhering to the paint surface and
code and color number are found on the data bank
the cold season, the lock cylinder should be industrial dust is prevented from penetrating the
paint. in the Maintenance booklet.
covered during a wash.
f Should the lock freeze, use an ordinary de-icer. Provided it is washed and treated with preserva-
In many cases, a well warmed key can help. tive regularly, the brand new finish of your car will
Never use excessive force. be retained for years to come.
f Apply paint preservative after the car wash and
Paint polish it dry to obtain a bright finish.

f Never rub a dusty car with a dry cloth since Polishing


dust particles are abrasive and could dull and Do not resort to using Porsche polish until it
damage the surface finish. becomes evident that the normal preservatives no
The paintwork of your car is exposed to all types longer produce the desired finish.
of mechanical and chemical conditions, particu-
larly climatic ones such as bright sunlight, rain, Spots and stains
frost and snow. Ultraviolet light, rapid changes in f Remove tar stains, grease, oil spots and dead
temperature, rain, snow, industrial dust and insects as soon as possible with Insect
chemical deposits constantly attack the paint Remover. They can cause discoloration if
which is only able to withstand such exposure in allowed to remain on the paintwork.
the long term if it is given regular care and atten-
tion. f Wash the affected area immediately after
treating it.
f Do not apply silicone polishes to the windshield
or windows.

176 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 177 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Engine compartment Windows Wiper blades


The engine compartment and the surface of the The road dust which settles on the windshield and Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
engine are treated with a corrosion-inhibitor at the windows contains particles of tire rubber and oil for a clear view.
factory. residue. The interior trim and upholstery release
f Replace the wiper blades twice per year
particles, particularly in strong sunlight, which
If degreasing solvents are used to clean the (before and after the cold season) or whenever
collect on the insides of the windows. These
engine compartment or the engine is washed wiper performance deteriorates.
deposits are augmented by impurities in the air
down, the process almost invariably removes the
which enters the car through the fresh air vents. f Periodically clean the wiper blades with
corrosion-inhibiting coating. It is then absolutely
Porsche window cleaner, especially after the
necessary to have a durable preservative applied f Clean all windows regularly, inside and outside,
vehicle has been washed in a car wash.
to all surfaces, body seams, joints and assemblies with Porsche window cleaner.
If they are very dirty (e.g. with insect remains),
in the engine compartment. This also applies
f If you use a chamois leather for the windows, they can be cleaned with a sponge or cloth.
when corrosion-inhibitor parts are replaced.
do not use it for paintwork as it will otherwise
If the wiper blades rub or squeak, this can be as a
pick up a certain amount of preservative or
Caution! result of the following:
polish and could smear the windows and thus
Risk of damage to the alternator. impair vision. – If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, residues may adhere to the windshield.
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at the f Remove dead insects with Porsche insect
These wax residues can be removed only by
alternator, or cover the alternator. remover.
using window cleaner concentrate.

Effective corrosion-proofing is particularly impor- Note – The wiper blades may be damaged or worn.
tant during the cold weather season. If your car is Door windows feature a water-repellent (hydro- f Replace damaged wiper blades as soon as
driven frequently in areas where salt has been phobic) coating which prevents soiling of the possible.
spread on the roads, the whole engine compart- windows. Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES” on
ment should be cleaned thoroughly after the This coating is subject to natural wear and can be Page 173.
winter to prevent salt from causing any lasting renewed.
damage. A full under-body wash should also be f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” on
performed at the same time. f Consult an authorized Porsche dealer. Page 170.
f Please contact your authorized Porsche dealer
for further information.

Maintenance, Car Care 177


10_GT3_21.book Seite 178 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Undercoating f Always apply a fresh coating of suitable preser- Light alloy wheels
vative to unprotected areas after cleaning the
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage underside of the body, the transmission, the f Please see the chapter “WASHING” on
to this protective coating in day to day driving, it engine or carrying out repairs to under-body, Page 175.
is advisable to have the underside of the car engine or transmission components.
inspected at certain intervals – preferably before Warning!
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
the start of winter and again in spring – and the
during the cold weather season. If your car is Danger of accident resulting in serious
undercoating restored as necessary.
driven frequently in areas where salt has been personal injury or death if cleaning agents
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the spread on the roads, the whole engine compart- (e.g. wheel cleaning agents) come into
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the ment should be cleaned thoroughly after the contact with the brake discs.
necessary equipment for applying factory winter to prevent salt from causing any lasting
approved materials. We recommend that you damage. A full under-body wash should also be The resulting film on the brake discs can
entrust them with such work and inspections. performed at the same time. impair braking performance.
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and f Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes contact with the brake discs.
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials
applied at the factory. Stainless steel exhaust tailpipes can discolor due f If cleaning agent has come into contact with
to soiling, strong heat, and combustion residues. the brake discs, thoroughly clean the brake
discs with a strong jet of water.
Warning! The original polish can be achieved again using
commercially available metal polishing paste or f Paying attention to any road users behind you,
Danger of fire resulting in serious personal
metal polish. dry the brake discs by applying the brakes at
injury or death.
short intervals.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold, Pitting may occur if metallic particles which cause
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat contact corrosion (e.g. brass or copper in brake
shields. During driving the substance used for dust) are allowed to remain on the aluminum for
undercoating could overheat and ignite. too long.
f If possible, wash the wheels with a sponge or
f Before applying fresh underseal, carefully
wash brush about every two weeks. In areas
remove any deposits of dirt and grease. Once
where salt is spread on winter roads or there is
it has dried, the new undercoating compound
a lot of airborne industrial dust, it is best to
forms a tough protective coating which
clean the wheels weekly.
provides efficient rust-proofing of the floor
panels and components.

178 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 179 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

The Porsche Light Alloy Wheel Cleaner Headlights, lights, interior and exterior This fine material is distinguished by an outstan-
(ph-value 9.5) can be used for this plastic parts, adhesive films ding seating comfort, special suppleness and a
purpose. typical patina.
If the ph-value of the detergent is incor- f Use only clean water and a little dishwashing
rect, the protective coating on the wheels detergent to clean light lenses, plastic Leather care and treatment
will be destroyed. headlight lenses, plastic parts and surfaces. f Clean all types of leather regularly to remove
Do not clean when dry. fine dust using a soft, damp, white woollen
Polishes which dissolve oxides, such as those Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth. cloth or a commercially available microfiber
frequently used for other metals, or abrasive Gently wipe the surface without applying too cloth.
tools or agents are unsuitable because they much pressure.
break down the oxide film of the protective The Porsche inside window cleaner is also f Remove heavy contamination with Porsche
coating and will cause discoloration of the suitable for cleaning plastic surfaces. leather cleaner.
wheel. Follow the cleaning instructions on the Please always follow the instructions for use
given on the containers.
f Every three months, after cleaning, coat the container.
wheels with a car wax or non-corrosive grease Never use other chemical cleaners or
solvents. Caustic cleaners and hard cleaning objects
(vaseline). must not be used.
Using a clean cloth thoroughly rub the grease f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
into the surface. Perforated leather must under no circum-
Leather stances get wet on its reverse side.
Door, roof, lid and window seals Once cleaned, leather (particularly the heavily
Characteristics and special features stressed leather seats) must be treated only with
f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salts) from
The natural surface markings of leather, e.g. Porsche leather care liquid.
all seals regularly using warm soapy water. Do
creases, healed scars, insect sting marks, struc-
not use any chemical cleaning agents or
tural differences and slight variations in shade and
solvents.
grain add to the attractiveness of the natural
When there is a frost hazard, the outer door seals leather product.
and the front and rear lid seals can be protected
A special mention must be made here of natural
against freezing into place by a suitable care
leather.
product.
For natural leather, carefully selected hides of the
In order to prevent damage to the anti- highest quality are used. It is not covered comple-
friction coating, the inner door seals must tely with dye on production.
not be treated with care products. “Nature’s signature” is therefore easily recogniz-
able.

Maintenance, Car Care 179


10_GT3_21.book Seite 180 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Cleaning airbags covers Fabric, upholstery, carpets and Alcantara


floor-mats
Danger! f Do not use a leather care product to clean
f Use only a vacuum cleaner or a medium stiff Alcantara.
Risk of danger of serious personal injury or brush.
death if the airbag system is impaired by For regular care it is sufficient to clean the cover
improper cleaning work. f Remove stains and spots with Porsche stain with a soft brush.
remover.
f Do not make any modifications whatsoever on Heavy abrasion or rubbing when cleaning causes
individual components such as the padded The Porsche range of accessories includes a lasting change in the surface.
covers of the steering wheel, passenger side nonskid floor-mats to protect the carpets in
instrument panel, the front seats and the door summer and winter. Cleaning when lightly soiled
linings. f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap
Warning!
f Let your authorized Porsche dealer clean solution and wipe off the dirt.
these components. Risk of an accident resulting in serious
Cleaning when heavily soiled
personal injury or death.
f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
f Always check the movement of the pedals
thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
before driving and make sure that they are not
outside in.
obstructed by a floor-mat or any other object.
f Secure the floor-mat to prevent it from sliding Safety belts
into positions that could interfere with the safe
operation of your vehicle - do not install them If it becomes necessary to clean the belts, you
loosely in the vehicle. can use any mild washing agent.
Your Porsche dealer will be glad to offer you Allow the belts to dry prior to retracting, but avoid
nonskid floor-mats of the correct size. direct sunlight.
f Only use suitable cleaners.
If unsuitable cleaners are used or any attempt
is made to dye or bleach the belts, the
webbing may be weakened and thus constitute
a safety risk.

180 Maintenance, Car Care


10_GT3_21.book Seite 181 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Storing your Porsche Climate control Vehicle interior


The air conditioning system should be in good The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged
working condition and fully charged. the floor carpets. The use of drying agents (Silica-
period, please consult your authorized Porsche
Gel) is recommended in vehicles with leather
dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the Windshield/Headlight washer interior and in areas with high humidity. The
most suitable and necessary methods.
f Check and correct antifreeze/cleaning solution recommended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
f Clean your vehicle thoroughly inside and level as necessary. (500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
outside.
Windows, doors and lids must be closed. The air
Clean the engine compartment. Electrical system vents should be opened.
The under carriage and chassis components
f Remove the battery from the vehicle and store
should be free of dirt and salt deposits.
it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
f Fill up the fuel tank. When the battery is disconnected, the
alarm system is deactivated.
f Change the oil and oil filter, and run the engine
for several minutes. f Recharge the battery every 3 months. If the
battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
f Increase the tire pressure to 58 psi (4 bar).
connected, it is necessary to check, remove
It is not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to
and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks.
the possibility of corrosion on shock absorber
Do not fast charge the battery.
piston shafts.
The vehicle should be moved slightly, approxi- f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
mately every four weeks, to prevent flat spot Page 211.
on the tires.

Maintenance, Car Care 181


10_GT3_21.book Seite 182 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Practical Tips, Emergency Service


Exercise Extreme Caution when Working
on your Vehicle ........................................... 183
Tires/Wheels .............................................. 184
Loading Information .................................... 195
Wheels with Central Locking ........................ 197
Central Bolts .............................................. 197
Changing a Wheel ....................................... 198
Checking Tire Pressure with a
Pressure Gauge.......................................... 203
Flat Tire ..................................................... 203
Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Platform or
Garage Lift ................................................. 206
Electrical System........................................ 207
Battery....................................................... 211
Replacing the remote-control battery ............ 216
Emergency Starting with Jumper Cables....... 217
Bulb chart .................................................. 219
Lights, Replacing Bulbs ............................... 219
Headlights.................................................. 220
License Plate Light...................................... 227
Front Side Lights, Front Turn Signal Lights,
Daytime Running Lights, Tail Lights and
Additional Brake Light ................................. 227
Adjusting Headlights.................................... 228
Towing....................................................... 230

182 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 183 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Exercise Extreme Caution when f In particular, be very careful to ensure that f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around
items of clothing (ties, shirt, sleeves etc.), the battery or fuel.
Working on your Vehicle jewelry, long hair, hand or fingers cannot get Keep a fire extinguisher in close reach.
caught in the engine-compartment blower, fan,
Danger! f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause
belts or other moving parts.
problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
Ignoring the following instructions may The radiator and radiator fan are in the front of
about any servicing, have it done by your
cause serious personal injury or death. the car.
authorized Porsche dealer.
The engine-compartment blower is mounted
f The engine compartment of any motor vehicle on the engine-compartment lid.
Improper maintenance during the warranty
is a potentially hazardous area. If you are not period may affect your Porsche warranty
The engine-compartment blower can start or
fully familiar with proper repair procedures, do coverage.
continue running as a function of temperature,
not attempt the adjustments described on the even with the engine switched off. f Supplies of fluids, e.g. engine oil, brake fluid or
following pages. Carry out work in these areas only with the coolant, are hazardous to your health.
This caution also applies to the entire vehicle. engine off, the ignition switched off, and Keep these fluids out of children’s reach and
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well exercise extreme caution. dispose of them in accordance with the appro-
priate regulations.
ventilated area. f Your Porsche is equipped with an electronic
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the ignition system. When the ignition is on, high f Some countries require additional tools and
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel voltage is present in all wires connected with special spare parts to be carried.
fumes might be present. Be especially the ignition system; therefore, exercise Please make enquiries before driving abroad.
cautious of such devices such as hot water extreme caution when working on any part of
heaters which ignite a flame intermittently. the engine while the ignition is on or the engine
is running.
f Before working on any part in the engine
compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool f Always support your car with safety stands if it
down sufficiently. Hot engine compartment is necessary to work under the car.
components can burn skin on contact. Jacks are not suitable for this kind of work.

f Be alert and cautious around engine at all f When working under the car without safety
times while the engine is running. stands but with the wheels on the ground,
If work has to be performed with the engine make sure the car is on level ground, the
running, always set the parking brake, and wheels are blocked, and that the engine
make sure the shift lever is in neutral position. cannot be started.
Remove the ignition key.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 183


10_GT3_21.book Seite 184 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Tires/Wheels Danger!
Risk of loss of control and serious personal
The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
injury or death.
your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. f If while driving, your vehicle experiences a
sudden vibration or ride disturbance, and/or
For your safety remember the following:
you suspect that possible damage to your tires
– Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit or vehicle has occurred, you should immedia-
your Porsche. tely reduce your speed without excessive use
of the brakes.
– If you intend to use other than original equip-
ment wheels, be sure that they conform to f Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
Porsche specifications for your model. inspect the tires.
Only tires with the same make and with the If you cannot determine the cause for the
same specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...) disturbance, have your vehicle towed to the
can be mounted. nearest Porsche or tire dealer to have your
vehicle or tire(s) inspected.
– The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
not meet specifications of the original factory f Continuing to operate the vehicle without
installed equipment will affect the safe opera- correction could result in a loss of control and Example
tion of your vehicle. serious personal injury.
– Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or Uniform Tire Quality Grading
snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims,
consult your authorized Porsche dealer. Your Quality grades can be found where applicable on
dealer has the technical information necessary the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
to advise you which wheel rims and wheel bolts maximum section width.
are compatible with the original factory instal- All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
lations. Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

184 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 185 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Treadwear Temperature A, B, C Tire pressures


The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested C, representing the tire’s resistance to the genera- Warning!
under controlled conditions on a specific govern- tion of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when Incorrect tire pressure causes increased tire
ment test course. tested under controlled conditions on a specified wear and adversely affects road handling.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one indoor laboratory test wheel. This could lead to tire failure, resulting in loss
Sustained high temperatures can cause the of control, leading to serious personal injury
and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the government
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire or death.
course as a tire graded 100.
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
The relative performance of tires depends upon
sudden tire failure. f Always use an accurate tire pressure gauge
the actual conditions of their use, however, and when checking inflation pressures.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
may depart significantly from the norm due to var-
iations in driving habits, service practices and dif-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet f Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard listed on the tire sidewall.
ferences in road characteristics and climate.
No. 109. Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor- PLATE” on Page 235.
mance on the laboratory test wheel than the
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are minimum required by law. f Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tire’s ability must be cold, ambient temperature maximum
to stop on wet pavement as measured under (68 °F/20 °C), when adjusting the inflation
Warning!
controlled conditions on specified government pressure.
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. The temperature grade for this tire is established Avoid sunlight striking the tires before measu-
A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- for a tire that is properly inflated and not ring cold pressures, since the pressures would
mance. overloaded. rise from temperature influence.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
f Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
Warning! loading, either separately or in combination, can
and thus from leakage.
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure, resul-
The traction grade assigned to this is based on Always screw caps tightly down.
ting in serious personal injury or death.
braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does Replace missing caps immediately.
not include cornering (turned) traction, accelera- f Use only plastic valve caps.
tion, hydroplaning or peak traction characteris-
tics. f Do not use commercially available sealant or
tire inflating bottles. Only use Porsche
approved tire sealant.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 185


10_GT3_21.book Seite 186 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR f Never let air out of hot tires.
COLD TIRES 68 °F/20 °C” on Page 237. This could cause the tire pressure to fall below
the prescribed value.
Each tire, should be checked every 2 weeks when
cold (68 °F/20 °C) and inflated to the inflation Insufficient tire filling pressure can cause tires to
pressure recommended in this Owner's Manual or overheat and thus be damaged – even invisibly.
on the tire-pressure plate. Hidden tire damage is not eliminated by subse-
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the quently correcting the tire pressure.
size indicated in this Owner's Manual or on the tire-
pressure plate, you should determine the proper Overloading
tire inflation pressure for those tires.
Danger!
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (TPM) Risk of damage to vehicle parts, loss of
that illuminates a low tire pressure message when control and serious personal injury or death.
one or more of your tires is significantly under-
f Do not overload your vehicle.
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
message illuminates, you should stop and check f If loading the vehicle also correct the tire
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle can
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly be found on the tire pressure plate and in the Example of a tire pressure plate
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and chapter technical data.
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
f Never exceed the specified axle load. Tire pressure plate
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Information on the tire pressure plate
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous
Please note that the TPM is not a substitute for vehicle reactions and long braking distances. A Seating capacity
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s Damage due to overloading is not covered by Maximum number of vehicle occupants, inclu-
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, the vehicle warranty. ding the driver.
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPM low tire pressure f Please see the chapter “LOADING INFORMA-
message. TION” on Page 195.
f Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
MONITORING” on Page 134. COLD TIRES 68 °F/20 °C” on Page 237.
When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
increased.

186 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 187 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

B Vehicle load limit Tire traction Tire wear


Is the maximum total weight limit specified of
the load (passengers and cargo) for the Warning! The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
vehicle. This is the maximum weight of passen- built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into
gers and cargo that can be loaded into the When driving on wet or slushy roads, a the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
vehicle. wedge of water may build up between the approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the
Please see the chapter “LOADING INFORMA- tires and the road. This phenomenon is tire tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in.
TION” on Page 195. known as “hydroplane” and may cause (1.6 mm).
partial or complete loss of traction, vehicle
C Tire size for the front axle control or stopping ability. When the indicators appear in two or more
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer adjacent grooves, it is time to replace the tires.
about the current release status. f Reduce speed on wet surface to prevent this. We recommend, however, that you do not let the
tires wear down to this extent.
D Recommended tire pressure for the front axle
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C). Tire life
and are even less effective on wet roads.
E Tire size for the rear axle Tire life depends on various factors, i. e., road In the United States, state laws may govern the
Check with your authorized Porsche dealer surfaces, traffic and weather conditions, driving minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such
about the current release status. habits, type of tires and tire care. laws.
F Recommended tire pressure for the rear axle. f Inspect your tires for wear and damage before
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C). driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial
G In vehicles with collapsible spare wheel: wear, wheels might need alignment or tires
Size and tire pressure of the spare wheel. should be balanced or replaced.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 187


10_GT3_21.book Seite 188 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Danger! Tire care Tire damage, puncture


Driving on worn tires can result in loss of
f Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims. High-pressure cleaning units or steam cleaners
control of the vehicle and could cause
can damage the tires.
serious personal injuries or death. f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. f Please see the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE
f Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing
CLEANING EQUIPMENT, STEAM CLEANERS”
cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden f Check tires for uneven wear and damage
on Page 174.
deflation and loss of control which could cause before driving off.
severe personal injury. f Check tires for imbedded material, cuts,
f Remove imbedded material.
punctures, cracks and bulges (side wall)
f Specialized high performance tires on high
f Replace worn or damaged tires immediately. before driving off.
performance sports cars exhibit more wear
than those on a family sedan, or even a high f Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires. In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain
performance sedan. whether there is a break in the ply with all its
f Replace missing valve stem caps.
Therefore, it is important to check your tire consequences or tire damage caused by thermal
pressure and condition at least every two f Keep tires inflated correctly. or mechanical overloading due to loss of pressure
weeks. or any other prior damage, we recommend that
f Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also
the tire be replaced for safety reasons.
clean inner side of wheels.
If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly,
If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
consult your Porsche dealer. f Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
Uneven wear may not always be due to improper the wheels.
exceed 30%.
wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
f Check wheel rims for corrosion. Handling inconsistencies may result.
driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If
the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted f Remove road salt, if driving in winter. f Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
regularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur.

188 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 189 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Danger! Tire replacements If new tires are installed only on one axle, a notice-
able change in handling occurs due to the different
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
If in doubt, contact your authorized Porsche tread depth of the other tires.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure
dealer. This happens especially if only rear tires are
increases risk of a tire failure and resulting
Use only tire makes and types approved by replaced. However, this condition disappears as
loss of control. Furthermore, low tire
Porsche. the new tires are broken in.
pressure increases rate of wear of the
affected tires. If you do not use a Porsche recommended f Please adjust your driving style accordingly.
f Check tires – including sidewalls – regularly for replacement tire, make sure that you Installation of new tires should only be done by a
foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges. purchase your new tires from a reputable tire qualified tire technician.
dealer and that the dealer complies with all
f After driving off road, examine tires for signs manufacturers warnings for those tires. Valves
of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or
foreign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a Only tires with the same make and with the Please observe the installation and replacement
damaged tire if necessary. same specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...) instructions for valves.

f Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if can be mounted. f Use only genuine Porsche metal valves.
possible.
Before mounting new tires, check with your f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs. valve caps.
Porsche dealer about the current release
f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly status. Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
the inner side) checked by an authorized of air.
Use tires with “ZR” quality standards. There
Porsche dealer.
are currently no standards concerning tire f Use only plastic valve caps.
strength at speeds above 150 mph (240 km/h).
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle
at the time.
Only tires of the same make and type must be
used. Mixed tires are not permissible.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 189


10_GT3_21.book Seite 190 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Parking at the curb Wheel alignment, wheel balancing Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors
Warning! As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and Before changing wheels, make sure that the
Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic snow tires before winter. wheels are compatible with your vehicle's TPM.
islands) are dangerous and may cause Unbalanced wheels may affect car handling and
hidden tire damage which is not noticeable f Check this with your authorized Porsche
tire life.
until later. Such damage can result in dealer.
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel
accidents at high speeds causing serious balancing.
personal injury or death. Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact
Depending on the force of impact, the edge with cleaning agents, since they could drop off.
of the rim can also be damaged. Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In
f If you are in doubt, have the wheel checked by this event, the vehicle should be checked at an
an expert, particularly if you suspect damage authorized Porsche dealer.
on the inside.
Warning!
f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. Exercise If, during a trip, uneven running or vibrations
care when parking along curbs. occur that could be caused by damage to
tires or the car, the speed must be reduced
immediately, but without braking sharply.
If you continue your trip without having the
cause of the fault remedied, you might lose
control of your vehicle which could cause
serious personal injury or death.
f Stop the vehicle and check the tires.
f If no cause for the fault can be found, drive
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche
dealer.

190 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 191 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Removing and storing tires Note Before mounting snow tires, consult with
your Porsche dealer. He has the technical
Under no circumstances should tires older than
f After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque information necessary to advise you on
6 years be used on your Porsche.
wheel bolts diagonally to 370 ftlb (500 Nm). wheel and tire compatibility.
The age of the tire can be obtained from the “DOT”
Tires must always remain on the same side of Snow tires should have the same load capacity as
code number. If, for example, the last four
the vehicle. original equipment tires and should be mounted on
numbers read 1209, then the tire was produced in
When wheels are removed, the direction of all four wheels.
the 12th week of 2009.
rotation and position of each wheel should be Snow tires with studs should be run at moderate
marked. f Store tires in a cool and dry place. speeds when new in order to give the studs time
to settle.
Example
Snow tires
FR (front right), FL, RR and RL. Danger!
For a better grip on snow and ice, use radial M+S
Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with Tires with badly worn treads and studs are
tires with studs.
their marking. very dangerous and could cause accidents
Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for
resulting in serious personal injuries or
The perception that tire durability and perfor- possible restrictions.
death.
mance are immune to the effects of storage and
age is unfounded. Danger! f Make sure they are replaced immediately.
Chemical additives, which make the rubber
elastic, lose their effectiveness in the course of
Risk of loss of control and damage to the f Do not drive a vehicle equipped with snow tires
vehicle as well as serious personal injury or at prolonged high speed.
time and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
death. Snow tires do not have the same degree of
Therefore, the tires should be inspected from The standard tires profile and rubber mixture traction on dry, wet or snowfree roads as a
time to time. are optimized for wet and dry driving condi- normal tire.
tions, and may not prove favorable for snow Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under
conditions. these conditions.
f Therefore install M+S tires before driving in
such conditions. Comply with all state and local laws
governing snow tire and tread depth require-
ments.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 191


10_GT3_21.book Seite 192 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Danger! Snow chains Tire designations


Risk of accident and serious personal injury
Caution! Due to new speed and load ratings for radial tires,
or death due to excessive speed.
new designations have come into force for snow
f Always check the maximum speed rating on Risk of damage to body, axle or brake tires for your Porsche.
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle. components.
The designation to be used for ZR tires is e.g.,
f Never exceed the maximum speed rating of f Fit snow chains only to the rear wheels, and 265/40 ZR 18 (Z = code letter for radial tires for
the tires. only with the tire/rim combination listed in the speeds above 150 mph / 240 km/h).
Technical Data.
f Fit winter tires to both axles well before the To ensure adequate clearance between chain
cold season begins. and body, Porsche recommends only the use
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased of fine-link chains such as those approved by
to advise you. Porsche.
f Follow instructions issued by the supplier of
Maintenance note the chains.
We recommend fitting snow tires on the vehicle at
temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) since the driving In order to mount snow chains the vehicle must be
performance of summer tires is reduced at low jacked up at the rear.
temperatures. Summer tires may be permanently Different states and countries have varying statu-
damaged at extremely low temperatures. tory requirements regarding maximum speed.
Winter tires lose their traction capability when their Check with local authorities for possible restric-
tread depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm). tions.
f Remove chains as soon as the roads are free
of ice and snow.

192 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 193 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

B TIN (Tire Identification Number)


Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
– DOT
The DOT symbol indicates that the tires
comply with the requirements of the US
Department of Transportation and provides
information about:
– first two-digit code means manufacturer’s
identification mark.
– second two-digit code means tire size.
– third four-digit code means tire type code.
– fourth four-digit code means date of manufac-
ture.
If, for example, the last four numbers read
0204, the tire was produced in the 2nd week
Example of Inscription
– ZR - code letter for radial tires for speeds of 2004.
above 150 mph / 240 km/h C Tire ply composition and material
Inscription on radial tire There are currently no standards concerning
tire strength at speeds above 150 mph The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls
A Tire size
(240 km/h). and their material composition.
Example: P 295/30 ZR 19 (100 Y)
– R - Belt type code letter for radial D Maximum permissible inflation pressure
– P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle.
– 19 - Indication of rim diameter in inches The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure
This information is not included on all tires.
to which a tire can be inflated.
– 295 - Indication of tire width in mm – 100 - Load capacity coefficient
f Do not exceed the permissible inflation
– 30 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio – (Y) - Speed code letter pressure.
in percent – XL (Extra Load) - Tire with increased load
rating

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 193


10_GT3_21.book Seite 194 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

E Maximum Load rating Tip on driving


The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower
be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
use a tire that has the same maximum load rating mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on
as the factory installed tire. the tire sidewall.
F Radial f Please note that in addition to the winter tires,
all-season and all-terrain tires are also subject
The identification indicates if the tire has radial
to speed limits and bear this identification.
structure.
G Term of tubeless or tube tire Inscription on light alloy wheels
Identification for tubeless tires.
Maintenance note

Speed code letter f Protect the valve inserts against soiling with
valve caps.
The speed code letter indicates the maximum Use only plastic valve caps.
permissible speed for the tire. Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss
This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall. of air.
A- Rim width in inches
B- Rim-flange contour code letter
T = up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Note on operation C- Symbol for drop-center rim
H = up to 131 mph (210 km/h) f The rim width in inches A and the rim offset F D- Rim diameter in inches
E- Double hump
are visible from the outside. F-
V = up to 150 mph (240 km/h) Rim offset in mm
The information is provided on the rear of the
W = up to 167 mph (270 km/h) spokes. The rim width and rim offset are also
Y = up to 186 mph (300 km/h) visible close to the tire valve in some cases.

(Y) = up to 186 mph (300 km/h) in accordance


with Y-tires. Speeds in excess of
186 mph (300 km/h) are possible with
a maximum load rating of 85 %
(confirmation of tire manufacturer in excess
of 186 mph (300 km/h) required).

194 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 195 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Loading Information The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the Danger!


maximum total weight rating of vehicle, passen-
Risk of loss of control, damage to the vehicle
gers and cargo.
Definitions and serious personal injury or death.
The Vehicle Capacity Weight - Load Limit - is
f Never exceed the specified axle loads.
The Curb weight - actual weight of your vehicle - the maximum total weight limit specified of the
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
vehicle weight including standard and optional load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
tires and car, as well as lead to dangerous
equipment, fluids and emergency tools. This is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo
vehicle reactions and long braking distances.
weight does not include passengers and cargo. that can be loaded into the vehicle. This informa-
Damage due to overloading is not covered by
tion can be found on the tire pressure plate.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is sum of the curb the vehicle warranty.
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
combined. sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle
capacity weight and production options weight.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the
maximum total weight of vehicle, passengers, The load rating is the maximum load that a tire
luggage and optional equipment. is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum The maximum load rating is the load rating for
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This infor- a tire at the maximum permissble inflation
mation is located on the safety compliance sticker pressure.
located in the driver’s side door jamb.
The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
For determining the compatibility of the tire and cargo, the substracted weight of passengers from
vehicle load capabilities: the load limit.
f Please see the chapter “TECHNICAL DATA” on f Never exceed the permissible limits.
Page 236.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “102”) is a
minimum requirement.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 195


10_GT3_21.book Seite 196 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Determining the combined weight of 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
occupants and cargo: passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
f Add the weight of all occupants and then add
the total luggage weight (figure). 4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
Steps for determining correct load limit For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of 400 lbs. and there will be two - 150 lb passen-
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX gers in your vehicle, the amount of available
pounds" on your vehicle’s placard. cargo and luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(400 - 300 (2 x 150) = 100 lbs.)
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
vehicle. and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.

Example for determining the combined weight of


occupants and cargo

Vehicle Load Capacity


f The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed the weight shown on the
tire plate in the vehicle.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
PLATE” on Page 235.
f Never exceed the number of passengers
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.

196 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 197 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Wheels with Central Locking Central Bolts


Wheels with central locking are perfectly normal in The central bolt and the lock are safety-related
motor sport, but on normal roads they are not components. Therefore, always check them for
common. Your GT3 is fitted with central locking signs of damage.
wheels as standard.
f The conical surface, trapezoidal thread and
Instead of the central lock nuts conventionally
internal toothing of the central bolt must not
used in motor sport, the GT3 wheel has a central
exhibit any scratches or cracks.
bolt, with which it is fastened to the wheel carrier.
Its anti-rotation device consists of an element f Replace damaged central bolts.
inserted into the wheel hub with spring-mounted Only use the genuine Porsche central bolts
locking bolt. allocated specifically to this vehicle model.
f The conical surface and trapezoidal thread
on the central bolt must be free of any
contamination.
f The central bolt must not contain any grease
except on the trapezoidal thread.

Tightening torque
6. Tightening torque for central bolts: 370 ftlb.
(500 Nm).

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 197


10_GT3_21.book Seite 198 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Note 1. Fully apply the handbrake, engage 1st gear


and withdraw the ignition key.
The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack,
torque wrench, assembly aids) are not supplied as 2. Carefully secure the car against rolling away
standard with the vehicle. Your authorized in both directions, e.g. by placing wedges
Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you. under the wheels on the opposite side.
This is particularly important on slopes.
If a wheel has to be changed, the procedure
described below must be adhered to exactly, 3. Raise the car until the wheel lifts off the
as otherwise the wheel may become loosened, ground. Lift vehicle only at the specified
resulting in damage. In such an event Porsche jacking points.
will not be held liable.
f Please see the chapter “LIFTING THE VEHICLE
For application of the required high tightening
WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM OR GARAGE LIFT”
torques of the central bolt, a suitable, commer-
on Page 206.
cially-available 370 ftlb./500 Nm torque wrench
may be used. Alternatively, a corresponding tool
with torque multiplier (part no. 997.450.323.90)
is available from Porsche Motorsport. When the
torque multiplier is used, the torque should be
Changing a Wheel reduced in accordance with the tool operating
instructions.
f Have the wheel changed at your authorized
Porsche dealer. Warning!
Risk of serious personal injury or death. The
car may slip off the jack.
f Due to the high assembly forces, there is a risk
of the car rolling away when using a jack.
Always use a lifting platform if there is one
available.
Risk of damage.
f Do not use an impact wrench.

198 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 199 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Caution! f The central bolt must always be opened using A very high torque is required to loosen the
the original tool (stored in the luggage central bolt.
Risk of damage due to scratches.
compartment). f Turn in the correct direction!
f Be careful when removing the wheel-hub cap.
f Always keep the wrench socket in the luggage f Prevent the wheel from turning by getting a
compartment so that it is available in the event second person to brake using the brake pedal.
4. Carefully lever out the wheel-hub cap using a
of a breakdown.
small screwdriver.
To do this, insert the screwdriver in groove A. 5. Insert the socket and fit it as far as it Warning!
Apply a piece of adhesive tape to the will go. This pushes back the safety lock Risk of damage to the safety lock.
screwdriver if necessary to avoid scratching in the central bolt.
the surface of the bolt. f When loosening the central bolt, make sure
Note that the tool remains fully inserted and
cannot slide off.
The socket locks in this position.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 199


10_GT3_21.book Seite 200 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Safety notes! f Apart from the threads on the central bolt and
wheel hub, all parts must be free of grease.
Carry out a visual inspection of all parts before
Apply some aluminum paste to the trapezoidal
fitting the wheel.
thread on the wheel hub if necessary.
The central bolt and the lock are safety compon-
ents and must always be checked for damage.
Warning!
f There must be no scratches or cracks on
the cone area, trapezoidal thread or inner Risk of damage to brake discs of the
teeth of the bolt. Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).

f The lock must not be removed from the wheel f Make sure not to tilt the wheel when fitting.
hub.
8. Fit the wheel carefully.
f Check the toothed locking pin for smooth
operation. Safety instruction!
When the pin is pressed into its cartridge,
The vehicle must not be standing on
it must return firmly to its original position
the wheel to be secured during fitting.
without catching.
6. Unscrew the central bolt and set it down in f The teeth on the locking pin must not be
such a way that no dirt can enter the cone area damaged.
or the trapezoidal thread.
f The affected parts must be replaced if they
are damaged or if you suspect that they are
Warning! not in perfect working order.
Risk of damage to brake discs of the f Only brake discs that were approved for the
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB). central lock may be fitted.
f Make sure not to tilt the wheel when removing. f The lock must be in the wheel hub.
7. Remove the wheel carefully. f All contact surfaces on the wheel, wheel hub
and brake disc, and the trapezoidal thread in
the wheel hub must show no signs of wear and
must be free of sand, dust and chips.

200 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 201 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

9. Insert the central bolt into the socket (until it


engages), fit the central bolt at right angles to
the wheel hub and screw it on without tilting.
10.Tighten the central bolt once to at least
370 ftlb. (500 Nm) using a suitable torque
wrench and then loosen again slightly (by
approx. 1/4 turn).
11.Tighten the central bolt to 370 ftlb.
(500 Nm).
Prevent the wheel from turning by getting
a second person to press the brake pedal.
If you do not have a suitable torque wrench
in a breakdown situation, the emergency
procedure for securing the central bolt must
be performed.
Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY PROCE-
DURE FOR SECURING CENTRAL BOLT” on
Page 202. 12.Remove the socket and check that the locking 13.Fit the wheel-hub cap in the central bolt so that
pin A has already engaged automatically in the the position finger is in the groove. Then
central bolt. The locking pin is then flush with press the cap into position.
the inner teeth of the central bolt. Apply a small amount of grease on the rubber
If the locking pin is still in the rear position, the ring of the cap beforehand if necessary.
pin must be turned to the left and right using
a square bar from the tool kit, for example, 14.Now lower the vehicle.
until it engages in the central bolt.

Warning!
Risk of damage and accident, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
The central bolt can loosen and the wheel
can fall off.
f Never drive without the locking pin being
engaged.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 201


10_GT3_21.book Seite 202 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Caution!
Using wheel cleaning agents:
Wheel cleaning agents can bleach the
anodised surface of the central bolt.
f Only use wheel cleaning agents approved
by Porsche and use these sparingly and in
accordance with instructions for use.

Emergency procedure for securing


central bolt
If, in the event of a breakdown, no suitable torque
wrench is available for tightening the central bolt
to the high tightening torque, the emergency
procedure for securing the central bolt must be
performed.
You will see the markings and on 3. Tighten the central bolt further using a long
f The central bolt must always be fitted using
the central bolt. lever until the marking covers the guide line.
the original tool (stored in the luggage
The bolt is then tightened securely.
compartment). 2. Draw a guide line on the wheel at the
marking . 4. Complete Steps 12 to 14.
1. Tighten the central bolt with great force
Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL”
using a long lever and loosen again
on Page 198.
slightly (by approx. 1/4 turn).
Tighten the central bolt to precisely 74 ftlb. f Have the central bolt loosened again
(100 Nm) using a torque wrench. immediately at your authorized Porsche
dealer and then tighten it to the
prescribed tightening torque of 370 ftlb.
(500 Nm) using a suitable torque wrench.

202 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 203 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Checking Tire Pressure with a Flat Tire Important note


Pressure Gauge Sealing the tire with the tire repair kit is only
Warning!
an emergency repair. Even with the tire air-
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
Failure to follow these instructions may result tight, it may be used only for short trips in an
2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem. in serious personal injury to you or to bystan- emergency.
ders. The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph
Note on operation (80 km/h).
f If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off
f Do not press too hard or force the valve stem the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and f Do not use commercially available sealant or
sideways, or air will escape. use other warning devices to alert other tire inflating bottles.
If the sound of air escaping from the tire is motorists. Set the parking brake. Use only the tire sealant located in the luggage
heard, reposition the pressure gauge. compartment.
f Do not park your vehicle where it may contact
3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and dry grass, brush or other flammable materials.
compare it to the permissble tire pressure. Warning!
The hot parts of the exhaust system could set
This information can be found on the tire such materials on fire, thereby causing both Risk of accident, resulting in serious
pressure plate or in the chapter Technical property damage and serious personal injury personal injury or death.
Data. or death.
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR f Have tires replaced by a specialist workshop
COLD TIRES 68 °F/20 °C” on Page 237. as soon as possible.
A tire sealant and compressor with pressure
4. Remove the pressure gauge. tester are located in the luggage compartment. f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
speeds.
f Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE f Please see the safety and operating instruc-
MONITORING” on Page 134. tions on the special sealant bottle with a
special Porsche part number and on the
compressor – these are essential.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 203


10_GT3_21.book Seite 204 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

The tire sealant and a compressor with pressure Warning!


tester can be found in the luggage compartment.
The sealant is highly flammable and harmful
The tire sealant comprises: to health.
– A filler bottle f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
when handling tire sealant.
– A sticker denoting the maximum permissible
speed for the driver’s field of vision f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing due to
caustic chemical properties of the tire sealant.
– A filler hose
f Keep tire sealant away from children.
– A valve turner and
f Do not inhale vapors, due to consequent harm
– A spare valve insert.
to personal health resulting in serious personal
injury or death.
Danger!
Risk of accident, resulting in serious In case of contact with the sealant:
personal injury or death.
f If sealant gets on the skin or in the eyes,
f Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or thoroughly rinse the affected part of the body
A - Filler bottle punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm). off immediately.
B - Filler hose
f Never use the tire sealant if the rim is f Change soiled clothing immediately.
damaged.
Tire sealant f Get medical attention immediately in the event
of an allergic reaction.
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts,
especially in the tire tread. f If sealant was swallowed, thoroughly rinse out
the mouth without delay and drink plenty of
Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an water.
emergency repair, so you can drive to the next Do not induce vomiting.
workshop. Even with the tire air-tight, it may be Get medical attention immediately.
used only for short trips in an emergency.

204 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 205 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

5.Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle. Care Instructions


The filler bottle is now open.
After drying, any sealant that emerges can be
6.Unscrew valve cap from tire valve F. peeled off like a film.
7.Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with
Warning!
valve turner D.
Keep the valve insert in a clean and dry place. Risk of accident, resulting in serious
personal injury or death.
8.Remove plug C of the filler hose B.
f Have the tire replaced by an authorized
9.Push filler hose onto the tire valve.
Porsche dealer immediately.
10.Hold filler bottle higher than the level of the tire
f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
valve and press it together forcefully until the
speeds.
bottle is completely emptied into the tire.
f Do not exceed maximum speed of 50 mph
11.Pull filler hose off the tire valve.
(80 km/h).
12.Twist the valve insert firmly into the tire valve
f Please always see the safety and operating
using the valve turner.
instructions, which can be found in the
A- Filler bottle 13.Connect the compressor to the cigarette separate operating instructions for the sealant
B- Filler hose lighter and inflate the tire to the prescribed tire and on the compressor.
C- Plug of the filler hose pressure.
D- Valve turner
E- Valve insert
Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURES FOR
F- Tire valve COLD TIRES 68 °F/20 °C” on Page 237.
14.Screw valve cap onto the tire valve.
Inserting sealant
15.Check the tire pressure after driving for around
1.Leave the object that caused the puncture in
10 minutes.
the tire.
If the tire pressure is less than 22 psi (1.5 bar),
2.Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from do not continue driving.
the luggage compartment. If a value of more than 22 psi (1.5 bar) is
indicated, correct the pressure to the
3.Adhere the sticker in the driver's field of vision.
prescribed value.
4.Shake filler bottle A.
16.Please consult your authorized Porsche
dealer.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 205


10_GT3_21.book Seite 206 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Platform lift
Before the car is driven on to a lifting platform, it
must be ensured that there is enough space
between the lifting platform and the vehicle.

Garage lift
A garage lift must be used only at the illustrated
jacking points.

Lifting the Vehicle with a Lifting Caution!


Platform or Garage Lift Serious personal injury or death and/or
The car must be raised only at the illustrated serious damage to the engine or the vehicle
jacking points. may occur, if you lift the vehicle improperly.
f Never lift the vehicle at any other place than
the jacking points.
f Never lift the vehicle by the engine, transmis-
sion or axles.
f Do not damage any sensitive components in
the vicinity of the jacking points.

206 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 207 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Electrical System
In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or
electronic systems, electrical accessories should
be installed at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Only use accessories authorized by Porsche.

Warning!
Risk of short circuit and fire, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Replacing fuses or relays with the engine
running or the ignition on could cause
electrical shock.
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the
battery during all work on the electrical
system.
Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on
In storage tray between the seats In the passenger’s footwell
Page 211.

Sockets If the engine is not running and the accessories


are switched on, the vehicle battery will be
Relays
Electrical accessories should preferably be discharged.
Defective relays should be changed only by an connected to the 12 V sockets. Do not operate additional accessories for more
than 5 minutes when engine is off. Continuing to
authorized workshop. f Please observe the maximum power do so may drain the battery such that it may go
consumption. completely dead.
Notes on operation Maximum power consumption for both
sockets together: 70 W.
The tire filling compressor must be connected to
the cigarette lighter. f Please observe the power specifications from
the accessory manufacturer.
The sockets and thus the connected electrical
accessories function even if the ignition is
switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 207


10_GT3_21.book Seite 208 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Alarm system, central locking Load switch-off after 2 hours or 7 days


The status of the central locking and alarm system If the ignition key is removed, loads which are
is not changed by disconnecting the battery. switched on or are in standby mode (such as the
When the battery is disconnected, the alarm luggage compartment light, interior light and
system ceases to function. radio) are automatically switched off after approx.
2 hours.
Central locking overload protection If the vehicle is not started or unlocked with the
remote control within 7 days, the remote control
If the central locking system is operated more standby function is switched off (to save the
than ten times within a minute, further operation is vehicle battery).
blocked for 30 seconds.
1. In this case, unlock the driver’s door with the
key at the door lock.
Leave the door closed in order to prevent the
alarm system from being triggered.
2. Press button 1 on the remote control.
The remote control is now activated again.

208 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 209 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.


We recommend using genuine Porsche fuses
for replacement.

Note
f If a fuse blows repeatedly consult an autho-
rized Porsche dealer.
f Never try to “repair” fuses: you may cause
serious damage to other parts of the electrical
system.

Replacing fuses A - Plastic gripper


B - Spare fuses
In order to prevent damage to the electrical
system due to short circuits and overloads, the 1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
individual circuits are protected by fuses. 2. Pull off plastic cover at the finger hole (arrow).
The fuse box is located in the driver’s footwell. The fuse plan and instructions for
emergency unlocking of the luggage
compartment lid can be found on the inner
side of the cover.
3. Remove the corresponding fuse from its slot
using the plastic gripper A in order to check it.
A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 209


10_GT3_21.book Seite 210 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Emergency unlocking of the luggage


compartment lid
If the battery is discharged, the luggage compart-
ment lid can be opened only with the aid of a donor
battery.

Note
The engine cannot be started with this method.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
STARTING WITH JUMPER CABLES” on
Page 217.

Unlocking lid
1. Use the key to unlock the vehicle at the door
lock.
2. Remove the plastic cover from the fuse box.
A - Plastic gripper (yellow) 5. Use the black jumper cable to connect the
3. Pull out positive terminal C (red) in the fuse box C - Positive terminal (red) negative terminal of the donor battery to the
using the plastic gripper A (yellow). door arrester D.
4. Use a jumper cable to connect the positive
terminal of the donor battery to the positive 6. Press button 2 on the remote control for
terminal C in the fuse box. approx. 2 seconds to unlock the luggage
compartment lid.
Note The alarm system is switched off.
If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn will sound 7. Disconnect the negative cable first, then the
when the negative cable is connected. positive cable.
8. Push positive terminal C into the fuse box and
push on the plastic fuse box cover.

210 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 211 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Battery f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact Charge state


with your skin, eyes, fabric or painted
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY OPERA- surfaces. A well charged battery will not only prevent
TION – PULLING OUT THE IGNITION KEY” on starting problems but will also last longer.
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
Page 69.
eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with In order to avoid discharging the battery
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY cold water for several minutes and call a unintentionally:
UNLOCKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPART- doctor.
MENT LID” on Page 210. f Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
f Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once traffic, on short trips or in a line or traffic.
with a solution of baking soda and water to
Warning!
neutralize the acid. f Always remove the ignition key from the
Risk of short circuit and fire, resulting in ignition switch when leaving the car.
Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
serious personal injury or death.
sories contain lead and lead compounds, f Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top
f Observe all warning notes on the battery. chemicals known to the State of California to and operation of the Porsche Communication
cause cancer and reproductive harm. Management system when the engine is not
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the running.
battery during all work on the electrical f Always protect your skin by washing
system. thoroughly with soap and water. In the cold season in particular or if the vehicle is
used primarily for short trips, it may be necessary
f Do not lay tools or other metal objects on the Risk of explosion as a result of static charge, to recharge the battery from time to time.
battery as they could cause a short circuit resulting in serious personal injury or death.
Porsche recommends the use of a charger, partic-
f Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth.
across the battery terminal.
ularly during extended immobilization periods.
Hydrogen gas generated by the battery
f Eliminate potential electrostatic charge by Please see your authorized Porsche dealer
could cause an explosion, resulting in for relevant information.
touching the vehicle before touching the
serious personal injury or death.
battery.
f Do not expose the battery to an open flame,
electrical spark or a lit cigarette.
f Do not wipe battery with a dry cloth.
Risk of serious personal injury or death and
damage to the fabric, metal or paint.
f Wear eye protection.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 211


10_GT3_21.book Seite 212 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Battery care Battery charging Slow battery charging


Automotive batteries loose their efficiency when 1. Pay attention to all warnings and follow instruc-
f Ensure that battery is securely mounted.
not in use. tions that come with your battery charger.
f Keep terminals and connections clean and The charge available in your battery can be
2. When charging, ensure adequate ventilation.
properly tightened. measured with a battery hydrometer.
Corrosion can be prevented by coating the We recommend that the battery voltage be tested 3. Remove battery.
terminals and connections with petroleum jelly by your authorized Porsche dealer who has the Please see the chapter “REMOVING THE
or silicone spray. appropriate equipment. BATTERY” on Page 214.
f Ensure that vent caps are securely tightened to If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the 4. All vent caps should be open.
prevent spillage. battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks. The fluid level should meet the indicator mark
A discharged battery allows rapid formation of in each cell.
Checking the electrolyte fluid level sulfates, leading to premature deterioration of the
5. Ensure that charger is switched off – danger of
Generally, the electrolyte level must be checked plates.
short circuit!
more often in summer than in the winter, and more
often when driving long distances. Warning! 6. Connect charger cables.
Charger cables must be connected
f When adding water, use only clean containers. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery POSITIVE (+) to POSITIVE (+) and
In no case may alcohol (e.g. window cleaner could cause an explosion, resulting in NEGATIVE (–) to NEGATIVE (–).
residues) be permitted to enter the battery. serious personal injury or death.
7. Switch on charger.
f Unscrew and open the filler vent caps of each f Charge battery in a well ventilated area. Normally, a battery should be charged at no
cell. f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode more than 10 percent of its rated capacity.
With the car on a level surface, the fluid level because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a Rated capacity of the battery in your vehicle is
should meet the indicator mark in each cell. frozen battery to thaw out first. listed on the battery housing.

f If necessary, top up with distilled water. f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your 8. After charging, turn off charger and disconnect
Do not use acid. eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with charger cables.
Only fill up to the mark, otherwise the electro- cold water for several minutes and call a 9. Tighten the vent caps and reinstall battery.
lyte will overflow when the battery is being doctor. Please see the chapter “INSTALLING THE
charged and cause damage. BATTERY” on Page 215.

212 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 213 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Winter operation Replacing battery Putting vehicle into operation


The capacity and ability of the battery to store The service life of the battery is subject to normal After the battery is connected or after an comple-
power decreases at low outside temperatures. wear; it depends greatly on care, climatic condi- tely discharged battery is charged, the multi-
Additionally, more power is consumed while tions, and driving conditions (distances, loads). functional PSM light lights up on the instrument
starting, and the headlights, heater, rear window panel and a message appears on the on-board
f Only use an original Porsche battery, with the
defogger, etc., are used more frequently. computer to indicate a fault.
correct part number, as a replacement.
f Let your Porsche dealer test the battery’s This fault can be remedied with a few simple
f Please observe the disposal instructions for
capacity before winter sets in. steps:
batteries.
The battery will discharge more quickly if your 1. Start the engine.
vehicle is not driven on a daily basis over a
2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few
distance of several miles. The more often you
steering movements to the left and right and
drive your vehicle, and the longer the distance
then drive a short distance in a straight line
driven on each trip, the more opportunity the
until the multifunctinal PSM light goes out and
vehicle’s charging system will have to recharge the
the message on the on-board computer
batteries.
disappears.
3. If the warnings do not disappear, then:
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
Porsche dealer.
Have the fault remedied.
4. After the warnings disappear:
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
f Perform adaptation of the power windows:
Please see the chapter “STORING END
POSITION OF THE WINDOWS” on Page 29.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 213


10_GT3_21.book Seite 214 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Removing the battery


The required tool is in the tool kit.
The battery is located in the luggage compart-
ment under a black plastic lid.

Warning!
Risk of damage to alternator and electronic
control units.
f Do not disconnect the battery while the engine
is running.
This also applies to cars equipped with a
battery main switch.
f Never drive the car with a disconnected
battery.
Risk of caustic burns from escaping acid.
1. Switch off engine and all electrical loads. 4. Important: disconnect the negative (–) ground
f Keep vent caps on to avoid spillage. wire first, and then the positive (+) cable -
2. Open turn-locks A.
danger of short circuit!
f Do not tilt the battery when removing and Remove plastic lid.
installing it. 5. Unscrew fastening screw B.
3. Pull off central vent hose C.
6. Remove battery.
Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Important: disconnect the negative (–) ground
wire first, and then the positive (+) cable.

214 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 215 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Installing the battery


1. Put battery in and push it all the way to the
stop.
2. Screw in fastening screw B.

Danger!
Risk of short circuit and explosion, resulting
in serious personal injury or death.
f Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,
and then the negative (–) ground wire.

3. Important: connect the positive (+) cable first,


and then the negative (–) ground wire -
danger of short circuit!
4. Push on central vent hose C.
Installing the plastic lid 4. Turn the turn-locks so that they point in
longitudinal direction.
1. Insert the two outer hooks of the plastic lid into
the eye mounts of the lid opening. 5. Press the turn-locks down until they audibly
engage.
2. Lower the lid.
3. Using both hands, push the lid into the eye
mounts without using force (if too much force
is used, the hooks may jam and the panel will
warp).
Make sure that the lid is correctly seated.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 215


10_GT3_21.book Seite 216 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

3. Replace the cover and press together firmly.


Please observe the disposal instructions for
batteries.

Note
f Please dispose batteries in compliance with
any and all government regulations.

Replacing the remote-control


battery
The battery should be changed when the range of
the radio remote control becomes smaller or
when the light-emitting diode no longer flashes
when the remote control is operated.
1. Using your finger nail or a small screwdriver,
carefully lift off the cover of the key grip
(arrow).
2. Replace the battery (paying attention to the
polarity).
Replacement battery – Lithium CR 2032,
3 volts.

216 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 217 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Emergency Starting with Jumper Warning! Danger of caustic burns.


Cables Risk of short circuit, damage and explosion, f Do not lean over the battery.
resulting in serious personal injury or death.
If the battery is discharged, e.g. in winter or after Danger of gas explosion.
f Use only jumper cables of adequate diameter
the car has been parked for a long time, the f Improper use of booster battery to start a
battery of another car can be used for starting cross-section and fitted with completely
vehicle may cause an explosion, resulting in
with the help of jumper cables. insulated alligator clips.
serious personal injury or death.
Make sure the voltage of both batteries is the f Follow all warnings and instructions of the
same. Both batteries must be 12 volt types. f Keep sources of ignition away from the
jumper cable manufacturer.
The capacity (Ampere hours, Ah) of the booster battery, e.g. open flame, burning cigarettes or
battery must not be substantially less than that of f When connecting jumper cables, make sure sparking due to cable contact or welding work.
that they cannot get caught in any moving
the discharged battery. f A discharged battery can freeze even at 23 °F/
The discharged battery must be correctly parts in the engine compartment.
–5 °C.
connected to the vehicle’s electrical system. The jumper cables must be long enough so
Before connecting jumper cables, a frozen
that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on battery must be thawed out.
Page 211. f The vehicles must not be in contact, otherwise
current might flow as soon as the positive
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY terminals are connected.
UNLOCKING OF THE LUGGAGE COMPART-
MENT LID” on Page 210. f The cable clamps must not be allowed to
contact each other when one end of the
Note jumper cables are connected to a battery.
f Do not try to start the car by pushing or f Ensure that tools or conductive jewelery (rings,
towing. Damage to the catalytic converters chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
and other components of the car may result. with the positive jumper cable or the positive
battery post.
f Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 217


10_GT3_21.book Seite 218 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Connect jumper cables in the following 4. Start the engine.


sequence: An attempted start using jumper cables should
not last more than 15 seconds. Then allow a
Always observe the sequence below: waiting period of at least one minute.
1. Connect the positive lead (red) to the f Note
positive terminal of the discharged battery Before disconnecting the jumper cables,
first, then connect it to the positive terminal of electrical loads such as the heated rear
the donor battery. window and the heating fan blower should be
2. First connect the negative cable (black) to switched on (the vehicle’s lights must not be
the negative terminal of the donor battery, then switched on). This reduces voltage peaks
connect it to a suitable grounding point on the which may occur when disconnecting the
vehicle with the discharged battery. jumper cables.
This grounding point must lie as far as possible
from the battery. With the engine running, remove both jumper
For example, a solid metal part or the engine cables in reverse order.
block are suitable grounding points.

If no suitable grounding points are to be found


on either vehicle, the negative cable must
carefully be connected directly to the negative
terminal of the battery.

If a suitable grounding point is to be found only


on the donor vehicle, the negative cable must
first be connected to the terminal of the
discharged battery, then to the grounding point
of the donor vehicle.
3. Run the engine of the donor car at a higher
speed.

218 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 219 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Bulb chart Lights, Replacing Bulbs


Type, rating Warning!
Halogen low beam H7, 55W Risk of short circuit.

Low beam with Bi-Xenon headlight Philips, D2S 35W f Always switch off the relevant consumer when
changing bulbs.
Halogen high beam H9, 65W
Risk of serious personal injury or death.
Additional high beam with Bi-Xenon headlight without cornering light H11, 55W The Bi-Xenon headlights are under high
voltage when installed.
Additional high beam with Bi-Xenon headlight with cornering light H7 LL, 55 W
f Be careful during all work in the area of the Bi-
Turn signal indicator light, side WY5W
Xenon headlights.
License plate light C5W Risk of damage. Bulbs of a higher wattage
can damage the lamp housing.
f Only the bulbs shown in the chart may be used.

f New bulbs must be clean and free from oil,


grease and fingerprints. Therefore, never
touch bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a cloth or soft paper while replacing bulbs.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 219


10_GT3_21.book Seite 220 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Headlights
Caution!
Risk of damage to headlights due to exces-
sive temperatures and abrasion.
f To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
the gap between headlight and body
(e.g. “stone guards” or films).
f Only use soapy water to clean light lenses and
plastic headlight lenses.
In no case may chemical cleaners or other
volatile cleaning fluids be used.
f To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.

Removing headlights 2. Remove rubber plug B from the unlocking


opening.
1. Unscrew plastic nut A.
Detach the side carpeting.

220 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 221 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Installing
1. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push
fully into the fender.
2. Push headlight to the rear and at the same
time turn the socket wrench until it points
horizontally to the rear C.
The headlight locking device must perceptibly
and audibly engage.
3. Insert the rubber plug into the unlocking
opening and secure the carpet.
Check the function of all lights.

3. Place socket wrench (tool kit) on the unlocking Low beam, high beam and additional high
spindle. beam
The handle of the wrench should point horizon-
tally to the rear. Opening the lid of the headlight housing
4. Turn socket wrench approx. 180° A. The 1. Unscrew the 4 screws A.
headlight is unlocked and pushed forward
2. First lift release tab B, then push both release
slightly during this process.
tabs C upwards and take off lid.
5. Turn socket wrench back until it is pointing
vertically downward B and leave in position.
6. The headlight is now unlocked and can be
pulled forward out of the fender.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 221


10_GT3_21.book Seite 222 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Halogen headlights: Bi-Xenon headlight (without cornering light): 2. Disengage both fixing loops A.
Changing bulb for low beam Changing bulb for low beam and high beam
3. Replace defective bulb B.
1. Pull off plug A. 1. Turn the plug counter-clockwise (bayonet lock) When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
and pull it off.
2. Disengage fixing loop B. 4. Engage both fixing loops A, push on plug and
turn right as far as the stop.
3. Replace defective bulb.
When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
4. Reassemble in reverse order.

222 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 223 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Closing lid of headlight housing


1. Push on lid until it perceptibly engages.
2. Fasten lid with the 4 screws.

Bi-Xenon headlight (without cornering light): 2. Pull both plug release tabs apart.
Changing bulb for additional high beam Pull plug out of the bulb holder.
Halogen headlights:
3. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
Changing bulb for low beam
4. Reassemble in reverse order.
1. Turn the bulb holder.
Turn it counter-clockwise on the left headlight
and clockwise on the right headlight.
Take bulb holder out of the headlight housing.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 223


10_GT3_21.book Seite 224 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Bi-Xenon headlight (with cornering light): 2. Turn the plug counter-clockwise and pull it off. 3. Disengage both fixing clips.
Changing bulb for low beam and high beam 4. Replace defective bulb.
1. Undo the 3 screws on the control unit and When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
remove the control unit.
5. Engage both fixing clips, push on plug and turn
clockwise until stop position is reached.
6. Reinstall the control unit and screw tight.
7. Push on housing cover until it perceptibly
engages.
8. Fasten housing cover with the 4 screws.

224 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 225 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Bi-Xenon headlight (with cornering light): 2. Pull off plug. 3. Disengage fixing clip.
Changing bulb for additional high beam
4. Replace defective bulb.
1. Turn cover counter-clockwise and take off.
5. Engage fixing clip, insert plug, reinstall the
cover and rotate clockwise to stop.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 225


10_GT3_21.book Seite 226 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Changing bulb for side marker light 3. Swivel out the indicator light and undo bulb
holder (bayonet lock).
1. Remove the cap in the wheel housing liner with
4. Remove the bulb from the holder and replace
a screwdriver.
it. Insert holder.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening in the Check operation of the light.
wheel housing liner parallel to the turn signal
5. Insert the turn signal’s retaining lugs A into the
housing (in direction of travel).
side section at the front.
By pressing with the screwdriver, disengage
Push in turn signal until the securing spring B
the securing spring of the turn signal housing.
is felt to engage.
6. Press the cap into the wheel housing liner.

226 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 227 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Front Side Lights, Front Turn


Signal Lights, Daytime Running
Lights, Tail Lights and Additional
Brake Light
These lights are equipped with light-emitting
diodes or light modules and cannot be replaced
individually. Replacement also involves a greater
amount of installation work.
f Have the defective light replaced at your autho-
rized Porsche dealer.

License Plate Light


Changing bulb
1. Unscrew both screws A and remove the light
lens.
2. Remove defective bulb from between the
contact springs and replace.
3. Reassemble in reverse order.
Check operation of the light.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 227


10_GT3_21.book Seite 228 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Adjusting Headlights For checking the headlight adjustment, the Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be
vertical position of the cutoff of the low beam (see carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical
f Please see the chapter “LIGHTS, REPLACING fig.) has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) adjustment unit.
BULBS” on Page 219. in distance of 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) from the front lens
of the headlamp. Distance
Adjustment The correct position of the cutoff is 2.0 in. (5 cm) Visual aim shall be performed at not less than
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to at 24.6 ft. or 7.5 m (0.4°) below a horizontal line, 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) (this value is a rounded down
drive and the fuel tank completely filled. x cm from ground to the center of the headlamp conversion from the 25-foot distance typical of
lens. field aim using a screen). The 24.6 ft. (7.5 m)
The driver’s seat must be loaded by a person or a
165 lbs. (75 kg) weight and the tire pressures distance is measured from the headlamp lens to
must meet the prescribed values. the viewing screen.
After being loaded, the car must be rolled a few
meters so that the suspension can settle.

228 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 229 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Floor
The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
and approximately level.

Screen
The screen upon which headlamp beams are
projected is perpendicular to the floor and the
vehicle’s longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in
color, unobstructed, and wide and high enough to
accommodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
aimed.
The screen should be wide enough to provide at
least 3.3 ft. (1 m) of space outboard of the
vehicle’s headlamp spacing.

Adjustment screws Halogen headlights and Bi-Xenon headlights:


f Detach side carpeting in luggage compart- B - Height adjustment
ment.
Unscrew plastic nut A. Note
Open the cover of the appropriate adjustment f Do not alter the lateral adjustment.
screw.
The setting is adjusted by turning the hexagon
socket screws right or left, as appropriate.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 229


10_GT3_21.book Seite 230 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Towing Towing hook


Certain state statutes and local ordinances The towing hook A is contained in the tool box in
prohibit towing with a chain, rope or even a tow the luggage compartment.
bar.
In addition, damage to your vehicle may result Caution!
from improper procedures.
Risk of damage to the vehicle.
Consult your authorized Porsche dealer for
details. f Use the towing hook only for an emergency to
remove the vehicle off the road. The towing
Vehicle towing hook is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto
the flat bed, tractor or towing aparatus if the
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
be used on Porsche vehicles. is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
Under certain circumstances, wheel lifts may be hook.
used when the vehicle will not roll.
f Never use the towing hook to tow this or any
The vehicle must be towed with all four
other vehicle.
wheels off the ground, otherwise damage to
the vehicle may result. f Bear in mind the limited ground clearance of Fitting towing hook
your car on uneven surfaces.
When fitting on the rear of the vehicle, the license
plate must be removed.
1. Press the lower edge of the appropriate
plastic cover into the bumper until the cover
disengages.
2. Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by
its thread.
3. Completely screw in the towing hook A.

230 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 231 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Removing towing hook Pulling vehicle onto flat bed Tying down vehicle on flat bed
1. Unscrew the towing hook A. 1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat 1. Carefully feed towing straps through the
2. Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the bed to reduce the angle of the pull. opening in the rear wheels.
opening. Make sure metal parts of straps do not
2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
damage rim.
3. Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge of the vehicle for any interference.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
to engage it in the bumper.
Make sure brake backing plate is not
When removing on the rear of the vehicle, the damaged.
license plate must be mouted.
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.

Practical Tips, Emergency Service 231


10_GT3_21.book Seite 232 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

4. Carefully feed towing straps through the


opening in the front wheels.
Make sure metal parts of straps do not
damage rim.
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
Make sure brake backing plate is not
damaged.
5. Secure straps to front of flat bed.
6. Release tension on hoist cable, but do not
disconnect.
Use hoist cable as a safety cable.

232 Practical Tips, Emergency Service


10_GT3_21.book Seite 233 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data


Vehicle Identification ................................... 234
Technical Data ........................................... 236
Engine Diagram at full Power ...................... 242

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 233


10_GT3_21.book Seite 234 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Vehicle Identification
When ordering spare parts or making inquiries,
please always quote the vehicle identification
number.

Vehicle data bank


The vehicle data bank is attached to the inside of
the “Maintenance” booklet.
It contains all important data about your vehicle.

Note
This data bank cannot be re-ordered if it is lost or
damaged.
This label contains the following information:
1. Vehicle Identification No.
Vehicle identification number Safety compliance sticker
2. Type/Type description
In accordance with Federal Safety Regulations, The safety compliance sticker is your assurance
3. Engine code/Transmission code
the vehicle identification number of your car is that your new Porsche complies with all applicable
4. Paint No./Interior located at the bottom left of the windshield frame Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
and can be seen from the outside. were in effect at the time the vehicle was manuf-
5. Optional equipment
actured.
The vehicle identification number is in the luggage
compartment under the battery cover and at the The sticker also shows the month and year of
bottom left behind the windshield. production and the vehicle identification number of
your car (perforations) as well as the Gross
Removing the battery cover Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY” on Rating.
Page 211.

234 Vehicle Identification, Technical Data


10_GT3_21.book Seite 235 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Tire pressure plate Engine number


The tire pressure plate is attached to the left-hand The engine number is stamped on the underside
door aperture. of the crankcase.

Vehicle Identification, Technical Data 235


10_GT3_21.book Seite 236 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Technical Data
Engine data

Type M 97/77
Horizontally opposed engine,
liquid cooled
Number of cylinders 6
Bore 4.04 in./102.7 mm
Stroke 3.01 in./76.4 mm
Cubic capacity 231.6 cu. in./3797 cm3
Net-horsepower 435 hp/320 kW
at crankshaft speed 7600 rpm
Net torque 317 ft. lb./430 Nm
at crankshaft speed 6250 rpm
Engine oil consumption up to 1.5 liters/1000 km
(1.6 quarts/622 miles)
Maximum permitted engine speed 8500 rpm
Engine control Stationary high-voltage distribution, sequential injection,
cylinder-selective knock-control, stereo oxygen sensor closed-loop control, diagnostic system,
4 overhead camshafts, Porsche VarioCam, hydraulic valve clearance compensation

236 Technical Data


10_GT3_21.book Seite 237 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Transmission

1st gear 3.82


2nd gear 2.26
3rd gear 1.64
4th gear 1.29
5th gear 1.06
6th gear 0.92

Reverse 2.86

Final drive ratio 3.44

Tire Pressures for cold tires 68 °F/20 °C

Summer tires front 29 psi (2.0 bar)


rear 31 psi (2.1 bar)

Snow tires front 29 psi (2.0 bar)


rear 35 psi (2.4 bar)
These tire filling pressures apply only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
f Please see the chapter “TIRES/WHEELS” on Page 184.
f Please see the chapter “TPM TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING” on Page 134.

Technical Data 237


10_GT3_21.book Seite 238 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Tires, Rims, Tracks

Tire Rim Rim offset Track

Summer tires front 235/35 ZR 19 (87Y) 8.5 J x 19 H2 53 mm 58.9 in./1497 mm


911 GT3 rear 305/30 ZR 19 (102Y) XL 12 J x 19 H2 63 mm 60.0 in./1524 mm

Snow tires front 235/35 R 19 87V M+S 8.5 J x 19 H2 53 mm


911 GT3 rear 295/30 R 19 100V XL M+S* 11 J x 19 H2 67 mm

The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “87”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “Y”) are minimum requirements.

Snow chains Can be mounted only on the rear wheels; maximum speed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Use only Porsche authorized fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Snow chain clearance can be guaranteed only on the tire + rim combination marked*.
Tire and rim sizes Extensive tests are performed before specific tires and wheels are approved by Porsche. Your Porsche dealer has informa-
tion about approved tires and wheels and is happy to assist you.
If aftermarket tires and/or wheels are installed which are not approved by Porsche, the vehicle’s driveability, stability while
in motion and handling characteristics might be impaired. Since Porsche has no data on such combinations, Porsche cannot
stand behind the safety or durability of these aftermarket combinations.

Danger!
Installation of sizes not authorized by
Porsche may have a dangerous effect on
the driving stability and could result in
severe personal injury or death.
f Before mounting new tires, check with your
Porsche dealer about the current release status.

238 Technical Data


10_GT3_21.book Seite 239 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Capacities
Use only fluids and fuels authorized by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will gladly advise you.
Your Porsche has been designed so that it is not necessary to mix any additives with oils or fuels.

Engine Oil change quantity without oil filter approx. 9.25 quarts / 8.75 liters
Oil change quantity with oil filter approx. 9.5 quarts / 9 liters
Please see the chapter “ENGINE OIL” on Page 159.

Coolant approx. 7.9 U.S. gallons / 30 liters

Manual transmission
and differential approx. 3.5 quarts / 3.3 liters transmission oil SAE 75W-90, Mobilube PTX

Fuel tank approx. 17.7 U.S. gallons / 67 liters

Fuel quality Your engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel economy using
unleaded premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON (93 CLC or AKI).
Porsche therefore recommends the use of these fuels in your vehicle.
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not always be available. Be assured that your vehicle
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels with octane numbers of at least 95 RON (90 CLC or AKI),
since the engine’s “Electronic Octane™ knock control” will adapt the ignition timing, if necessary.

Power steering approx. 1.35 quarts / 1.27 liter hydraulic fluid Pentosin CHF 11 S ® or Pentosin CHF 202 ®

Brake fluid 0.67 quarts / 0.63 liters; use only Original Porsche brake fluid.

Windshield washer approx. 2.6 quarts / 2,5 liters without headlight washer
approx. 6.3 quarts / 6 liters with headlight washer

Technical Data 239


10_GT3_21.book Seite 240 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Weights

911 GT3

Empty weight (depending on equipment) 1395 kg to 1480 kg


3075 lbs. to 3263 lbs.
Maximum gross weight 3704 lbs./1680 kg
Maximum axle load, front* 1411 lbs./640 kg
Maximum axle load, rear* 2293 lbs./1040 kg

* The maximum gross weight must not be exceeded.


Note: If additional accessories are installed, the useful load will be correspondingly less.

Driving Performance*

911 GT3

Top track speed 194 mph (312 km/h)


Acceleration 0 - 60 mph 4.0 seconds
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h (62 mph) 4.1 seconds

* At DIN empty weight and half load, without performance-inhibiting extra equipment

240 Technical Data


10_GT3_21.book Seite 241 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Dimensions

Length 176.3 in./4479 mm


Width without door mirrors 71.2 in./1808 mm
Width with door mirrors 76.9 in./1952 mm
Height 50.4 in./1280 mm
Wheelbase 92.7 in./2355 mm
Ground clearance 3.7 in./93 mm
at maximum gross weight
Turning circle 35.8 ft./10.9 m

Suspension setup

Driving on public highways and on


race circuits
Front axle toe +0’ ±2’
Rear axle toe +13’ ±2’
Front axle camber –1°30’ ±5’
Rear axle camber –1°30’ ±5’

The stabilizers at the front and rear axles can be adjusted individually.
We also recommend using the standard adjustment when driving on the racing circuit.
On public highways, the running gear must be in the standard position.

Technical Data 241


10_GT3_21.book Seite 242 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Engine Diagram at full Power

242 Technical Data


10_GT3_21.book Seite 243 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Index
A Antilock brake system (ABS) ..........................57 B
ABS (antilock brake system) .......................... 57 Warning light.........................................58 Backrest
Warning light ........................................ 58 Ashtray ........................................................81 Adjustment ...........................................33
Adaptive sports seat ..................................... 34 Audio operation ......................................89, 90 Release ................................................33
Adjusting Headlights.................................... 228 Auto-button, air conditioning...........................98 Battery.......................................................211
Advanced Airbag........................................... 42 Automatic Care...................................................212
Aerodynamic components ............................... 6 Air conditioning system .........................98 Charge state.......................................211
Air conditioning compressor .................. 98, 100 Anti-glare mirrors ..................................31 Charging ............................................212
Air conditioning system ................................. 98 Car washes ........................................175 Putting vehicle into operation ...............213
Air distribution ...................................... 98, 100 Door locking ...................................21, 25 Remote control ...................................216
Air filter...................................................... 172 Garage door .........................................71 Removing ...........................................214
Air intake.................................................... 101 Headlight adjustment.............................74 Replacing ...........................................213
Airbag Speed control .........................78, 79, 108 Warning light.......................................115
Advanced ............................................. 42 Automatic locking retractor ...........................50 Winter operation..................................213
Cleaning covers .................................. 180 Automatic speed control..............................108 Before driving off ....................................11, 12
Deactivation device ............................... 46 Indicator light......................................108 Belts ............................................................38
Function ............................................... 42 AUX, external audio source............................93 Cleaning .............................................180
Maintenance ......................................... 45 Average consumption..........................118, 147 Height adjustment .................................40
Warning light ........................................ 45 Average speed ...................................118, 147 Tensioner .............................................38
Airbag Systems ............................................ 41 Warning light.........................................39
Alarm system .........................................26, 91 Blower adjustment ......................................101
Deactivating passenger compartment Blower speed adjustment ..............................99
monitoring............................................ 27 Brake
Fault indication...................................... 27 Break in................................................13
Function indication ................................ 26 Light ..................................................227
Not active .......................................... 208 Light, additional ..................................227
Alcantara, cleaning ..................................... 180 Pads ....................................................56
Antenna ............................................... 91, 175 Pedal ...................................................55
Antifreeze .................................................. 158 Wear ....................................................56
Antifreeze in coolant ................................... 158

Index 243
10_GT3_21.book Seite 244 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Brake fluid Central locking......................................22, 208 Compressor .................................................87


Changing............................................ 163 Automatic relocking...............................22 Coolant ..............................................112, 158
Checking level .................................... 162 Emergency operation ............................23 Checking ............................................158
Level.................................................. 162 Fault indication......................................24 Level ..................................................158
Warning light ...................................... 163 Overload protection.......................24, 208 Temperature gauge.............................112
Brakes ....................................................... 162 Central locking button ...................................24 Topping off .........................................158
Brake circuit division warning light........ 163 Central vents ..............................................101 Warning light.......................................112
Brake warning light ............................. 116 Central warning light ...................................116 Cooling system ...................................112, 158
Fluid........................................... 162, 239 Changing bulb.............................................227 Warning light.......................................112
Fluid warning light ............................... 163 Check engine Cornering light
Function ............................................... 54 Warning light.......................................116 Functional description............................74
New brake pads or linings ..................... 56 Check engine warning light ..........................116 Indicator light ......................................111
Pads .................................................... 13 Opening the oil filler cap ......................161 Crankcase ventilation ..................................169
Parking brake ....................................... 53 Checking pressure ......................................203 Cruise control .................................78, 79, 115
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake Child restraint systems..................................47 Cupholder.....................................................80
(PCCB) ................................................... 6 Anchorages ..........................................52
Service brake ......................................... 6 Direction of installation ..........................48 D
Test stand............................................ 61 Child seat bracket.........................................51
Data bank...................................................234
Break in brakes ............................................ 13 Chime ..........................................................73
Daytime running lights ...................................73
Break in hints ............................................... 13 CHRONO Stopwatch....................................127
Changing bulbs ...................................227
Bulbs, replacing.......................................... 219 Cigarette lighter............................................82
On-board computer .............................146
Circulating-air button .....................................99
Decals........................................................175
C Clock .................................................114, 146
Defrosting windows .................................32, 99
Clothes hook ................................................83
Capacities .................................................. 239 Diagnostic socket .........................................14
Clutch ..................................................53, 155
Car care .................................................... 174 Diagram
Clutch pedal .................................................53
Car telephone............................................... 91 Engine diagram ...................................242
Combination filter........................................172
Car washes ................................................ 175 Dimensions.................................................241
Coming home mode......................................74
Carpet ....................................................... 180 Door ............................................................21
Communication management.........................89
Catalytic converters .................................... 169 Handles ................................................21
Compact disc
Cautions ............................................ 157, 183 Locks ...........................................21, 176
Player ..................................................90
Mirror...................................................31
Storage................................................84
Mirror heating .......................................32
Compartment monitoring...............................26
Mirrors .................................................30
Windows.................................21, 29, 177

244 Index
10_GT3_21.book Seite 245 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Driving Engine compartment Fuel................................................... 113, 165


Hints .................................................... 11 Blower .........................................71, 112 Containers ..................................... 7, 167
Driving performance ................................... 240 Blower fan ..........................................112 Economy ........................................... 164
Drop-center rim .......................................... 194 Care...................................................177 Evaporation control ............................ 167
Dynamic cornering light Lid .................................................85, 86 Fuels containing ethanol...................... 167
Functional description............................ 74 Lid warning light....................................85 Level gauge ....................................... 113
Dynamic engine mounting.............................. 63 Engine oil Level warning light.............................. 113
Choosing the right oil ..........................160 Recommendation ....................... 166, 167
E Consumption ........................................13 Recommendations.............................. 166
Topping off .........................................160 Tank.................................................. 166
Electrical system ........................................ 207
Viscosity.............................................160 Fuses, replacing......................................... 209
Emergency flasher switch.............................. 72
Exhaust
Emergency operation
Pipes .....................................................8 G
Central locking...................................... 23
Tailpipes, stainless steel ......................178
Ignition key ........................................... 69 Garage
External antenna ...........................................91
Lids ................................................... 210 Door ................................................... 71
External audio source, AUX............................93
Tank flap ............................................ 165 Door opener ........................................ 95
Emergency service ..................................... 183 Lift .................................................... 206
Emergency starting with jumper cables 217, 218 F Glove compartment...................................... 84
Emission control system ............. 116, 168, 169 Filler flap ....................................................165 Gong....................................... 17, 68, 73, 120
Engine Filling pressure, tire.....................................237 Ground clearance........................................... 8
Checking the oil level........................... 143 Fire extinguisher ...........................................94
Exhaust.................................................. 8 Flat tire ......................................................203 H
Number.............................................. 235 Floor mats..................................................180
Halogen headlights
Oil consumption ............................ 13, 159 Fluids and fuels...........................................239
Changing bulb for low beam ................ 222
Oil level .............................................. 160 FM reception ................................................89
Handbrake................................................... 53
Oil level indicator ................................ 143 Fog light, rear...............................................73
Head restraints ............................................ 33
Oil pressure........................................ 115 Footbrake.....................................................54
Headlights ................................................. 220
Oil temperature................................... 108 Fresh air intake ...........................................101
Adjusting ................................... 228, 229
Oils ............................................ 159, 239 Front axle lift system
Beam adjustment ................................. 74
Speeds ........................................ 13, 240 Functional description............................64
Cleaning system................... 76, 170, 239
Starting................................................ 70 Lowering front axle................................65
Flasher ................................................ 75
Stopping .............................................. 71 Raise front axle .....................................64
Heated rear window ..................................... 32
Front lid .................................................85, 86
Heated rear window/Door mirror heating ..... 102

Index 245
10_GT3_21.book Seite 246 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Heater ......................................................... 98 K Luggage compartment ..................................88


High beam Key codes ....................................................18 Lid .......................................................85
Indicator light...................................... 111 Key-operated airbag deactivation device .........46 Lid warning light ....................................85
Lever ................................................... 73 Keys ......................................................18, 19 Unlocking lid .........................................19
High-pressure cleaning equipment................ 174 Luggage compartment/engine compartment
Home mode ................................................. 74 lid, warning lights ..........................................85
HomeLink..................................................... 95
L
LATCH System .............................................51
Hoods.................................................... 85, 86 M
Leather care...............................................179
Horn ................................................ 15, 22, 24
License plate light.................................73, 227 Maintenance ...............................................157
Hot exhaust pipes ........................................... 8
Lids .............................................................86 Make-up mirror .............................................37
Emergency unlocking ..........................210 Maximum permitted engine speeds ................13
I Lifting vehicle .............................................206 Manual transmission ............................155
Ignition key................................................... 67 Light Mirror
Emergency operation ............................ 69 Changing bulb for low beam (Halogen Folding in..............................................30
Ignition lock.................................................. 67 headlight) ...........................................222 Heating ........................................32, 102
Immobilizer .................................................. 18 Daytime running ....................................73 Inside ...................................................31
Indicator lights.................................... 104, 106 Flasher ...................................73, 75, 111 Mirrors .........................................................31
INFO Warning messages ............................. 123 Low beam ......................................73, 75 Anti-glare ..............................................31
Instrument Sensor for instrument illumination.104, 106
Hochschaltanzeige ...................... 111, 155 Switch............................................73, 75 N
Illumination ......................................... 108 Light alloy wheels Navigation ....................................................89
Lights .................................................. 73 Inscription ..........................................194 Selection field, on-board computer .......133
Panel ................................. 104, 106, 148 Lights Notes on
Interior lights ................................................ 66 Care ..................................................179 Car care .............................................174
Interior mirror............................................... 31 Headlight beam adjustment....................74 Maintenance .......................................157
iPod interface ............................................... 93 LIMIT Acoustic warning signal for speed limit.120 Number plate light.........................................73
Load switch-off ...........................................208
J Loading information ....................................195
Jumper cables............................................ 217 Locking........................................................22
Conditions ............................................24
Locking retractor ..........................................50
Low beam ....................................................75

246 Index
10_GT3_21.book Seite 247 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

O P Rear window defogger.......................... 32, 102


Octane rating .....................................166, 167 Paint Rear window heating .................................. 102
Odometer .................................................. 109 Care...........................................174, 176 Recirculating-air button ................................. 99
Off delay ...................................................... 74 Data...................................................235 Refueling ................................................... 166
Oil ............................................................. 159 Parking brake ...............................................53 Relays ....................................................... 207
Checking level .................................... 143 Warning light.........................................54 Remote control ............................................ 19
Choosing the right oil .......................... 160 Parking light ...........................................73, 75 Readiness............................................ 20
Consumption ........................................ 13 Particle filter ...............................................172 Replacing battery ............................... 216
Level checks ...................................... 160 Passenger compartment monitoring...............26 Standby funktion .................................. 20
Level indicator .................................... 143 Pen holder....................................................84 Synchronization.................................... 20
Pressure ............................................ 115 Plastic parts ...............................................179 Replacement key.......................................... 18
Temperature....................................... 108 Care...................................................179 Replacing bulbs.......................................... 219
Topping off engine oil.......................... 160 Platform lift.................................................206 Replacing wiper blades ............................... 173
OIL Display and measurement of the Porsche Active Suspension Management Rims
engine oil level............................................ 143 (PASM) .........................................................63 Diameter ........................................... 194
On-board computer ..................................... 117 Sport mode ..........................................63 Rim width........................................... 194
Basic settings............................. 118, 145 Switching off Sport mode ......................63 TPM sensors...................................... 190
Calling on-board computer functions..... 118 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB) .......6 Running in.................................................... 13
Functions and display possibilities ........ 118 Porsche Communication Management (PCM)...89
General information..................... 146, 147 Porsche Stability Management (PSM)..............59 S
Language versions.............................. 145 Information light ....................................61 Safety belts ................................................. 38
Operation, controls ............................. 117 Power steering fluid level.....................171, 239 Cleaning ............................................ 180
Selecting a radio station ...................... 133 Power windows.............................................21 Height adjustment ................................ 40
Setting the clock................................. 146 Practical tips ..............................................183 Tensioner ............................................ 38
Switching daytime running lights on/off. 146 Putting vehicle into operation .......................213 Warning light........................................ 39
Switching on navigation ....................... 133 Safety compliance sticker........................... 234
Tire pressure warnings ........................ 139 R SC OFF button ............................................. 60
Warnings and messages...................... 148 SC+TC OFF button ....................................... 61
Radiator fan..........................................71, 159
On-board literature .......................................... 2 Sealing set ................................................ 204
Radio reception ............................................89
Operating voice control ............................... 117 Seals ........................................................ 179
Rain sensor ............................................76, 77
Operating your Porsche in other Countries.... 164 Care.................................................. 179
Range on remaining fuel ......................118, 147
Orientation light ............................................ 66
Reading light ................................................66
Outside temperatur indicator ....................... 114
Rear lid ..................................................85, 86
Oxygen sensor ........................................... 169
Rear view mirrors..........................................31

Index 247
10_GT3_21.book Seite 248 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Seat Starter switch ...............................................67 Tire


Adaptive sports seat ............................. 34 Starting........................................................68 Care...................................................188
Adjustment ........................................... 33 Starting engine .............................................70 Damage .............................................188
Heating ................................................ 36 Steam cleaners ..........................................174 Designations .......................................192
Position................................................ 33 Steering column Pressure plate ....................................186
Sports bucket seat ............................... 35 Locking ................................................68 Replacements .....................................189
Sports seat .......................................... 34 Steering lock ................................................67 Traction..............................................187
Service ...................................................... 124 Steering wheel Wear ..................................................187
Service brake ................................................. 6 Adjustment ...........................................36 Tire filling compressor...................................87
SET Basic setting on on-board computer ...... 145 Lock ....................................................68 Tire pressure
Shifting gears Stopping engine............................................71 Compressor..........................................87
Manual transmission............................ 155 Stopwatch..................................................127 Tire pressure monitoring
Side lights, front ......................................... 227 Storage options ............................................83 Warning light.......................................141
Side marker light .................................. 73, 226 Storage possibilities......................................83 Wheels ...............................................190
Side vents .................................................. 101 Storing your Porsche ..................................181 Tire pressure monitoring (TPM) ....................134
Snow chains............................................... 192 Sun visors ....................................................37 Tires ............................................13, 184, 238
Snow tires.................................................. 191 Suspension management...............................63 Care...................................................184
Socket....................................................... 207 Suspension setup .......................................241 Checking pressure ..............................203
Spare key .................................................... 18 Inscription...........................................193
Speed code letter ....................................... 193 T Loading information.............................195
Speed control............................................... 79 New tires..............................................13
Tachometer................................................111
Automatic............................................. 78 Pressure.....................................185, 237
Tail light .....................................................227
Indicator light...................................... 108 Pressure monitoring ............................134
Tank ..........................................165, 166, 239
Speed limit......................................... 120, 193 Pressure plate ....................................235
Ventilation system ...............................167
Speedometer ............................................. 110 Removing and storing ..........................191
Technical data ............................................236
Sport button................................................. 62 Sealant.................................87, 203, 204
TEL Telephone information ..........................124
Sport Chrono Plus package Sidewall..............................................193
Telephone ....................................................91
CHRONO stopwatch ............................ 127 Size ...................................................193
Temperature setting................................98, 99
Sport mode.................................................. 62 Snow tires ..........................................191
Temperature, outside indicator ....................114
Sport tires...................................................... 5 Sport......................................................5
Test stand
Sports bucket seat ....................................... 35 Tool kit.........................................................87
Measurements ......................................61
Sports seat .................................................. 34 Tools ...........................................................87
Theft protection ............................................17
Stability Control (SC) ..................................... 60 Towing ...............................................230, 231
Stability management system (PSM)............... 59 Towing hook ...............................................230

248 Index
10_GT3_21.book Seite 249 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Towing lug ................................................... 87 V W


TPM Tire pressure monitoring...................... 134 Valves ........................................................189 Warning lights and messages...................... 148
Tracks ....................................................... 238 Vanity mirror.................................................37 Washer
Traction Control (TC)..................................... 61 Vehicle Fluid .......................................... 170, 239
Transmission.............................................. 237 Care...................................................174 Fluid warning light............................... 170
Drive-Off Assistant............................... 155 Engine number....................................235 Lever................................................... 76
Fluid........................................... 172, 239 Identification .......................................234 Washing .................................................... 175
Manual transmission............................ 155 Identification label ...............................234 Weights ..................................................... 240
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ............ 155 Identification number ...........................234 Welcome Home Function .............................. 74
Trip Odometer ............................................ 109 Lifting.................................................206 Wheel.......................................... 13, 184, 238
Trunk entrapment ......................................... 88 Load capacity .....................................196 Alignment .......................................... 190
Turn signal Putting into operation ..........................213 Balancing........................................... 190
Indicator light...................................... 111 Safety compliance sticker....................234 Care.................................................. 184
Turn signals ......................................... 75, 111 Washing .............................................175 Central bolts ...................................... 197
Turn signals, front....................................... 227 Vehicle identification number........................234 Changing ................................... 198, 203
Ventilation ....................................................98 Checking pressure ............................. 203
U Vents ...................................................98, 101 Inscription.......................................... 193
Undercoating...................................... 168, 178 Viscosity, engine oil.....................................160 Loading information............................ 195
Upshift indicator .................................111, 155 Voice control, button ...................................117 Security wheel bolts ............................. 87
USB interface ............................................... 93 Voice control, PCM .....................................117 Sidewall............................................. 193
Size .................................................. 193
Tire pressure ............................. 185, 237
Tire pressure plate ............................. 235
Tire sealant................................ 203, 204
Wheels
Care.................................................. 178
Central bolts ...................................... 197
Tightening torque ............................... 197
TPM sensors...................................... 190

Index 249
10_GT3_21.book Seite 250 Donnerstag, 4. Juni 2009 12:48 12

Windows .................................................... 177


Anti-crushing protection ......................... 29
Care .................................................. 177
Opening/Closing ................................... 29
Washer nozzles .................................... 76
Washer system ..................... 76, 170, 239
Windshield
Washer nozzles .................................... 76
Wiper blades, changing ....................... 173
Wiper/washer lever ............................... 76
Windshield wipers ................................. 76, 173
Replacing ........................................... 173
Winter operation
Battery............................................... 213
Coolant .............................................. 158
Engine oil ........................................... 159
Jumper cables ............................ 217, 218
Locks ................................................ 176
Seals ................................................. 179
Snow chains ....................................... 192
Tires .......................................... 191, 238
Washer fluid ....................................... 170
Wiper blades ...................................... 173
Wiper
Blades ............................................... 173
Lever ................................................... 76
Wiper blades
Care .................................................. 177
Changing............................................ 173

250 Index

You might also like